Trusted Business
Verified & Licensed
Virus Free Files
100% Safe Downloads
Secure Payment
SSL Protected
Instant Delivery
Available Immediately
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
$36.95
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Instant PDF Download
Available immediately
Save to Your Device
Download & keep forever
Antivirus Scanned
100% virus-free
Trusted Worldwide
175,000+ customers
Description
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FILE DETAILS:
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Language : English
Pages : 4451
Downloadable : Yes
File Type : PDF
IMAGES PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
DESCRIPTION:
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FOREWORD:
- This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2004 INFINITI FX35/FX45.
- In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task.
- All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ABS00A37
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
2004 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
fwd............................................................................................................................. 1 Exit........................................................................................................................ 0 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 1 FOREWORD.................................................................................................................... 2 A: GENERAL INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 1 GI - General Information................................................................................................ 0 B: ENGINE................................................................................................................... 1 EM - Engine Mechanical.................................................................................................. 0 LU - Engine Lubrication System.......................................................................................... 0 CO - Engine Cooling System.............................................................................................. 0 EC - Engine Control System.............................................................................................. 0 FL - Fuel System........................................................................................................ 0 EX - Exhaust System..................................................................................................... 0 ACC - Accelerator Control System........................................................................................ 0 C: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE................................................................................................... 1 AT - Automatic Transmission............................................................................................. 0 D: DRIVELINE/AXLE........................................................................................................... 1 TF - Transfer........................................................................................................... 0 PR - Propeller Shaft.................................................................................................... 0 FFD - Front Final Drive................................................................................................. 0 RFD - Rear Final Drive.................................................................................................. 0 FAX - Front Axle........................................................................................................ 0 RAX - Rear Axle......................................................................................................... 0 E: SUSPENSION............................................................................................................... 1 FSU - Front Suspension.................................................................................................. 0 RSU - Rear Suspension................................................................................................... 0 WT - Road Wheels & Tires................................................................................................ 0 F: BRAKES................................................................................................................... 1 BR - Brake System....................................................................................................... 0 PB - Parking Brake System............................................................................................... 0 BRC - Brake Control System.............................................................................................. 0 G: STEERING................................................................................................................. 1 PS - Power Steering System.............................................................................................. 0 H: RESTRAINTS............................................................................................................... 1 SB - Seat Belts......................................................................................................... 0 SRS - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)............................................................................... 0 I: BODY..................................................................................................................... 1 BL - Body, Lock & Security System....................................................................................... 0 GW - Glasses, Window System & Mirrors................................................................................... 0 RF - Roof............................................................................................................... 0 EI - Exterior & Interior................................................................................................ 0 IP - Instrument Panel................................................................................................... 0 SE - Seat............................................................................................................... 0 J: AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................... 1 ATC - Automatic Air Conditioner......................................................................................... 0 K: ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 1 SC - Starting & Charging System......................................................................................... 0 LT - Lighting System.................................................................................................... 0 DI - Driver Information System.......................................................................................... 0 WW - Wiper, Washer & Horn............................................................................................... 0 BCS - Body Control System............................................................................................... 0 LAN - LAN System........................................................................................................ 0 AV - Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System........................................................................ 0 ACS - Auto Cruise Control System........................................................................................ 0 PG - Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements............................................................................ 0 L: MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 1 MA - Maintenance........................................................................................................ 0 M: INDEX.................................................................................................................... 1 IDX - Alphabetical Index................................................................................................ 1 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)....................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS............................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)............................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)............................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX............................................................................................ 83 Comment Sheet............................................................................................................... 3 Inch to Metric Conversion Table............................................................................................. 4 QUICK REFERENCE CHART....................................................................................................... 5 acc............................................................................................................................. 8 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 8 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 9 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 9 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 10 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 10 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION................................................................................... 10 acs............................................................................................................................. 12 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 12 ASCD.................................................................................................................... 14 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)............................................................................... 14 Description..................................................................................................... 14 ICC..................................................................................................................... 15 PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................................... 15 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”..................... 15 Precautions for ICC System Service.............................................................................. 15 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis........................................................................... 15 PREPARATION......................................................................................................... 16 Special Service Tool............................................................................................ 16 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 17 Outline......................................................................................................... 17 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 17 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 17 BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION)........................................................................ 17 System Diagram.................................................................................................. 17 Components Description.......................................................................................... 18 CAN Communication............................................................................................... 18 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT...................................................................................... 18 Switch Operation................................................................................................ 18 ICC System Display.............................................................................................. 19 ACTION TEST......................................................................................................... 20 ICC System Running Test......................................................................................... 20 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 20 Set Checking............................................................................................ 20 Check For Increase Of The Cruising Speed................................................................ 20 Check For Decrease Of The Cruising Speed................................................................ 20 Check For The Cancellation Of Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode (Normal Driving Condition)....... 20 Check For Restoring The Speed That Is Set By Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode Before Canc....... 20 Check For ON/OFF Switch................................................................................. 21 Check For ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, CANCEL Switches......................................................... 21 Check For Distance Switch............................................................................... 21 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 21 Set Checking............................................................................................ 21 Check For Increase Of The Cruising Speed................................................................ 22 Check For Decrease Of The Cruising Speed................................................................ 22 Check For The Cancellation Of Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode (Normal Driving Cond....... 22 Check For Restoring The Speed That Is Set By Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode Befor....... 22 Check For ON/OFF Switch................................................................................. 22 Check For ACCEL/ RES, COAST/SET, CANCEL Switches........................................................ 22 LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................ 23 Outline......................................................................................................... 23 Preparation..................................................................................................... 23 Outline of Adjustment Procedure................................................................................. 23 Setting the ICC Target Board.................................................................................... 23 ADJUSTING HEIGHT OF THE TARGET.............................................................................. 23 ADJUSTING THE RIGHT-LEFT POSITION OF THE TARGET............................................................. 24 SETTING THE TARGET.......................................................................................... 24 Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................... 25 CHECK AFTER THE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................. 28 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION........................................................................................... 29 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.................................................................. 29 WIRING DIAGRAM...................................................................................................... 30 Schematic....................................................................................................... 30 Wiring Diagram — ICC —.......................................................................................... 31 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE....................................................................................... 38 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Unit...................................................................... 38 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Sensor.................................................................... 39 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................. 40 Work Flow....................................................................................................... 40 CONSULT-II Function............................................................................................. 41 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 41 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 41 WORK SUPPORT................................................................................................ 42 Work Item............................................................................................... 42 Cause of Auto-Cancel.................................................................................... 42 Laser Beam Adjust....................................................................................... 42 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..................................................................................... 42 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................ 43 Operation Procedure..................................................................................... 43 Monitored Item.......................................................................................... 43 ACTIVE TEST................................................................................................. 44 Caution................................................................................................. 44 ICC BUZZER 1............................................................................................ 45 METER LAMP.............................................................................................. 46 STOP LAMP............................................................................................... 46 BOOSTER SOL/V 3......................................................................................... 46 Self-Diagnostic Function........................................................................................ 46 WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................................. 46 WITHOUT CONSULT-II.......................................................................................... 47 Self-Diagnostic Erasing Method.......................................................................... 48 SELF-DIAGNOSIS BY ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY WILL NOT RUN........................................................... 48 Possible Irregular Condition............................................................................ 48 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS......................................................................... 51 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart............................................................................. 51 DTC 11 CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................. 52 DTC 20 CAN COMM CIRCUIT......................................................................................... 52 DTC 31 POWER SUPPLY CIR, DTC 34 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2.............................................................. 53 DTC 41 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC....................................................................................... 53 DTC 43 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC......................................................................................... 54 DTC 45 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW....................................................................................... 54 DTC 46 OPERATION SW CIRC........................................................................................ 56 DTC 61 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 57 DTC 62 BOOSTER SOL/V CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 58 DTC 63 RELEASE SW CIRCUIT....................................................................................... 59 DTC 65 PRESSURE CONTROL......................................................................................... 60 DTC 74 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR...................................................................................... 60 DTC 90 STOP LAMP RLY FIX........................................................................................ 61 DTC 92 ECM CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 65 DTC 96 NP RANGE................................................................................................. 66 DTC 97 AT CIRCUIT............................................................................................... 67 DTC 98 GEAR POSITION............................................................................................ 67 DTC 102 RADAR STAIN............................................................................................. 68 DTC 103 LASER SENSOR FAIL....................................................................................... 69 DTC 104 LASER AIMING INCMP...................................................................................... 69 DTC 107 LASER COMM FAIL......................................................................................... 69 DTC 109 LASER HIGH TEMP......................................................................................... 69 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS...................................................................................... 70 Symptom Chart................................................................................................... 70 Symptom 1: ON/OFF Switch Does Not Switch ON..................................................................... 71 Symptom 2: The ICC System Cannot Be Set (ON/OFF Switch Turns On/Off)............................................ 71 Symptom 3: The ICC System Cannot Be Operated by the CANCEL Switch, ACCEL/RES Switch, or DISTANCE ............... 72 Symptom 4: The ICC System Is Not Cancelled When the Gear Is in Other Than ‘D’................................... 73 Symptom 5: Chime Does Not Sound................................................................................. 73 Symptom 6: Driving Force Is Hunting............................................................................. 74 Symptom 7: The ICC System Frequently Cannot Detect the Vehicle Ahead/The Detection Zone Is Short................ 74 Symptom 8: The System Does Not Detect the Vehicle Ahead at All.................................................. 74 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSPECTION..................................................................................... 76 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 76 ICC Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch........................................................................... 76 Booster Solenoid................................................................................................ 76 Release Switch.................................................................................................. 77 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 78 ICC Unit........................................................................................................ 78 ICC Sensor...................................................................................................... 78 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 78 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 at.............................................................................................................................. 80 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 80 INDEX FOR DTC........................................................................................................... 84 Alphabetical Index.................................................................................................. 84 DTC No. Index....................................................................................................... 85 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 86 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 86 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine.................................................. 86 Precautions......................................................................................................... 87 Service Notice or Precautions....................................................................................... 88 ATF COOLER SERVICE.............................................................................................. 88 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS........................................................................................... 88 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 88 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 89 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 89 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 90 A/T FLUID............................................................................................................... 91 Changing A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 91 Checking A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 91 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning........................................................................................... 93 A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE............................................................................. 93 A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE............................................................................ 94 A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................... 95 A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION............................................................................... 95 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 96 Cross-Sectional View (2WD Models)................................................................................... 96 Cross-Sectional View (AWD Models)................................................................................... 97 Shift Mechanism..................................................................................................... 98 CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................... 98 FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE.................................................................................... 98 CLUTCH AND BAND CHART........................................................................................... 99 POWER TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................. 100 “N” Position................................................................................................ 100 “P” Position................................................................................................ 100 “D1"Position................................................................................................ 101 “M1” Position............................................................................................... 102 “D2"Position................................................................................................ 103 “M2” Position............................................................................................... 104 “D3"and"M3"Positions........................................................................................ 105 “D4"and"M4"Positions........................................................................................ 106 “D5"and"M5"positions........................................................................................ 107 “R” Position................................................................................................ 108 TCM Function........................................................................................................ 109 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE.......................................................................................... 109 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 109 CAN Communication................................................................................................... 110 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 110 Input/Output Signal of TCM.......................................................................................... 110 Line Pressure Control............................................................................................... 111 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN.................................. 111 Normal Control.............................................................................................. 111 Back-up Control (Engine Brake).............................................................................. 111 During Shift Change......................................................................................... 112 At Low Fluid Temperature.................................................................................... 112 Shift Control....................................................................................................... 112 SHIFT CHANGE.................................................................................................... 112 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 113 Lock-up Control..................................................................................................... 113 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL................................................................... 113 Lock-up Control System Diagram.............................................................................. 113 Lock-up Released............................................................................................ 113 Lock-up Applied............................................................................................. 114 SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL.......................................................................................... 114 Half-clutched State......................................................................................... 114 Slip Lock-up Control........................................................................................ 114 Engine Brake Control................................................................................................ 115 Control Valve....................................................................................................... 115 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................... 115 FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 116 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM........................................................................................ 117 Introduction........................................................................................................ 117 OBD-II Function for A/T System...................................................................................... 117 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II........................................................................... 117 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 117 TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 117 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)................................................................................ 117 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC................................................................................ 117 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data............................................................ 118 HOW TO ERASE DTC................................................................................................ 118 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II).............................................................................. 119 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)..................................................................................... 119 HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)..................................................................................... 120 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................................................................... 120 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 120 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 121 DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................................................................... 121 Fail-Safe........................................................................................................... 121 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 121 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)................................................................ 121 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor........................................................................... 121 Throttle Position Sensor.................................................................................... 121 PNP Switch.................................................................................................. 121 Starter Relay............................................................................................... 121 A/T Interlock............................................................................................... 122 A/T 1st Engine Braking...................................................................................... 122 Line Pressure Solenoid...................................................................................... 122 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid............................................................................ 122 Low Coast Brake Solenoid.................................................................................... 122 Input Clutch Solenoid....................................................................................... 122 Direct Clutch Solenoid...................................................................................... 122 Front Brake Solenoid........................................................................................ 122 High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid........................................................................ 122 Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2............................................................................ 122 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 123 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 123 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 124 Work Flow Chart............................................................................................. 124 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET............................................................................................ 125 Information From Customer................................................................................... 125 Diagnostic Worksheet Chart.................................................................................. 125 A/T Electrical Parts Location....................................................................................... 128 Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................... 129 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................ 130 A/T FLUID CHECK................................................................................................. 130 Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check......................................................................... 130 Fluid Condition Check....................................................................................... 130 STALL TEST...................................................................................................... 130 Stall Test Procedure........................................................................................ 130 Judgement Stall Test........................................................................................ 131 LINE PRESSURE TEST.............................................................................................. 131 Line Pressure Test Port..................................................................................... 131 Line Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................ 131 Line Pressure............................................................................................... 132 Judgement of Line Pressure Test............................................................................. 133 ROAD TEST....................................................................................................... 133 Description................................................................................................. 133 Check Before Engine is Started...................................................................................... 134 Check at Idle....................................................................................................... 134 Cruise Test - Part 1................................................................................................ 136 Cruise Test - Part 2................................................................................................ 139 Cruise Test - Part 3................................................................................................ 140 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears................................................................................... 141 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 141 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 141 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up........................................................ 142 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 142 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 142 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up............................................................ 143 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 143 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 143 Symptom Chart....................................................................................................... 144 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values............................................................................ 169 A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT.................................................................. 169 TCM INSPECTION TABLE............................................................................................ 169 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 170 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 170 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE...................................................................................... 170 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE.................................................................................... 172 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE..................................................................................... 173 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 173 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 173 How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results........................................................................ 176 DATA MONITOR MODE............................................................................................... 176 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 176 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 176 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE........................................................................................... 179 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 179 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 181 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II............................................................................. 182 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)..................................................................... 182 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)..................................................................... 182 TCM SEL......................................................................................................... 182 Description................................................................................................. 182 Diagnostic Procedure........................................................................................ 182 Judgement Self-diagnosis Code............................................................................... 183 Erase Self-diagnosis........................................................................................ 183 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................ 184 Description......................................................................................................... 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 184 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 184 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 184 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 184 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN........................................................................................... 185 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 186 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT.......................................................................................... 187 Description......................................................................................................... 187 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 187 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 187 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 187 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 187 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 187 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG......................................................................................... 188 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 189 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.................................................................................. 191 Description......................................................................................................... 191 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 191 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 191 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 191 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 191 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 191 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 191 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW........................................................................................ 192 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 193 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR).................................................................. 195 Description......................................................................................................... 195 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 195 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 195 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 195 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 195 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 195 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 196 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T........................................................................................ 197 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 198 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL........................................................................................... 200 Description......................................................................................................... 200 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 200 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 200 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 200 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 200 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 200 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 200 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 200 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE........................................................................ 202 Description......................................................................................................... 202 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 202 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 202 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 202 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 202 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 202 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 202 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 203 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)................................................................................ 204 Description......................................................................................................... 204 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 204 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 204 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 204 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 204 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 204 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 205 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 205 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 206 Description......................................................................................................... 206 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 206 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 206 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 206 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 206 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 206 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 206 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 207 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY).................................................................... 208 Description......................................................................................................... 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 208 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 208 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 208 Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER......................................................................................... 209 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 210 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM)............................................................................. 212 Description......................................................................................................... 212 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 212 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 212 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 212 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 212 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM)............................................................................. 213 Description......................................................................................................... 213 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 213 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 213 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 213 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 213 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 213 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM).......................................................................... 214 Description......................................................................................................... 214 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 214 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 214 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 214 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 214 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 214 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR...................................................................................... 215 Description......................................................................................................... 215 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 215 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 215 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 215 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 215 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 215 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 215 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 215 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT.......................................................................... 218 Description......................................................................................................... 218 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 218 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 218 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 218 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 218 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 218 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 218 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS........................................................................................... 219 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 220 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 221 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2.................................................................................. 221 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR..................................................................................... 222 Description......................................................................................................... 222 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 222 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 222 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 222 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 222 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 222 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 222 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 223 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR...................................................................................... 224 Description......................................................................................................... 224 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 224 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 224 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 224 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 224 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 224 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 225 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 226 Description......................................................................................................... 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 226 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 226 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 226 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 226 Judgement of A/T Interlock.......................................................................................... 226 A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE............................................................................ 227 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 227 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING........................................................................................ 229 Description......................................................................................................... 229 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 229 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 229 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 229 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 229 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 229 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 230 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................... 231 Description......................................................................................................... 231 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 231 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 231 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 231 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 231 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 232 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION.......................................................................... 233 Description......................................................................................................... 233 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 233 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 233 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 233 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 234 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 234 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................... 235 Description......................................................................................................... 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 235 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 235 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 235 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 235 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 236 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................................... 237 Description......................................................................................................... 237 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 237 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 237 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 237 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 237 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 237 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 238 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 238 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 239 Description......................................................................................................... 239 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 239 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 239 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 239 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 239 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 239 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 239 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 240 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION......................................................................... 241 Description......................................................................................................... 241 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 241 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 241 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 241 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 241 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 242 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................... 243 Description......................................................................................................... 243 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 243 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 243 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 243 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 243 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 243 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 244 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................... 245 Description......................................................................................................... 245 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 245 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 245 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 245 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 245 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 245 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 246 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 246 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................ 247 Description......................................................................................................... 247 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 247 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 247 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 247 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 247 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 248 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION....................................................................... 249 Description......................................................................................................... 249 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 249 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 249 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 249 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 249 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 249 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 249 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 250 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH............................................................................................ 251 Description......................................................................................................... 251 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode..................................................................... 251 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 251 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 251 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 251 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 251 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW.......................................................................................... 252 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 254 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 255 MANUAL MODE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 255 A/T Position Indicator.............................................................................................. 256 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 256 A/T Position Indicator Symptom Chart........................................................................ 256 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1......................................................................................... 257 Description......................................................................................................... 257 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 257 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 257 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 257 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 257 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 257 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 258 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3......................................................................................... 259 Description......................................................................................................... 259 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 259 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 259 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 259 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 259 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 259 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 260 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5......................................................................................... 261 Description......................................................................................................... 261 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 261 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 261 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 261 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 261 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 261 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 262 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6......................................................................................... 263 Description......................................................................................................... 263 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 263 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 263 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 263 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 263 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 263 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 264 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT........................................................ 265 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 265 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 265 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.................................................................................................... 266 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 266 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 266 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS.......................................................................................... 267 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC........................................................................................ 267 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........................................................................... 270 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 270 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 270 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position..................................................................... 272 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 272 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 272 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed.......................................................................... 272 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 272 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 272 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves...................................................................................... 273 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 273 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 273 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)................................................................................... 274 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 274 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 274 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position..................................................................... 277 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 277 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 277 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position...................................................................... 280 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 280 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 280 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1................................................................................... 282 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 282 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 282 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2........................................................................................ 285 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 285 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 285 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3........................................................................................ 287 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 287 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 287 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4........................................................................................ 290 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 290 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 290 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D5........................................................................................ 292 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 292 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 292 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up........................................................................................ 295 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 295 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 295 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition................................................................................. 297 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 297 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 297 Lock-up Is Not Released............................................................................................. 299 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 299 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 299 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle................................................................................ 300 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 300 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 300 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode.................................................................................... 301 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 301 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 301 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear -> 4th gear............................................................................ 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear -> 3rd gear............................................................................ 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear -> 2nd gear............................................................................ 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear -> 1st gear............................................................................ 308 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 308 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 308 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake......................................................................... 310 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 310 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 310 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 312 Control Device Removal and Installation............................................................................. 312 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 313 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 313 Adjustment of A/T Position.......................................................................................... 313 Checking of A/T Position............................................................................................ 313 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM................................................................................................... 314 Description......................................................................................................... 314 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location......................................................................... 314 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT......................................................................................... 315 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 316 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE..................................................................................................... 318 Components.......................................................................................................... 318 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 319 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 319 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 320 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 321 Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2........................................................... 321 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 321 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................. 321 Removal..................................................................................................... 321 Installation................................................................................................ 325 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................... 328 Removal..................................................................................................... 328 Installation................................................................................................ 330 Parking Components (2WD Models Only)................................................................................ 332 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 332 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 332 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 335 Rear Oil Seal....................................................................................................... 338 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 338 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 338 Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)...................................................................... 339 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 339 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 339 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 341 AIR BREATHER HOSE....................................................................................................... 343 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 343 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................ 343 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................ 344 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................... 345 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)............................................................................... 345 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 345 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 345 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 346 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 346 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 347 Removal and Installation (AWD models)............................................................................... 348 COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)......................................................................................... 348 COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)......................................................................................... 349 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 349 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 351 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 351 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 351 OVERHAUL................................................................................................................ 353 Components.......................................................................................................... 353 Oil Channel......................................................................................................... 361 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings........................................ 363 DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................. 365 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 365 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS.............................................................................................. 382 Oil Pump............................................................................................................ 382 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 382 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 382 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 383 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch.................................................................................. 385 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 385 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 385 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 385 3rd One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 385 Front Sun Gear Snap Ring.................................................................................... 385 Front Sun Gear.............................................................................................. 386 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 386 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear..................................................................... 387 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 387 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 389 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 390 Front Carrier Snap Ring..................................................................................... 390 Input Clutch Snap Ring...................................................................................... 390 Input Clutch Drum........................................................................................... 390 Input Clutch Drive Plates................................................................................... 390 Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................. 390 Front Carrier............................................................................................... 390 Rear Internal Gear.......................................................................................... 390 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 391 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub........................................................ 393 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 393 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 393 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 395 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring.......................................... 395 1st One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 395 Mid Sun Gear................................................................................................ 395 Rear Sun Gear............................................................................................... 395 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub............................................................................. 395 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 396 High and Low Reverse Clutch......................................................................................... 399 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 399 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 400 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 400 High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring....................................................................... 400 High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................... 400 High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates.............................................. 400 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 400 Direct Clutch....................................................................................................... 402 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 402 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 403 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 403 Direct Clutch Snap Ring..................................................................................... 403 Direct Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................................. 403 Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................ 403 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 403 ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................ 404 Assembly (1)........................................................................................................ 404 Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 417 TOTAL END PLAY.................................................................................................. 417 Assembly (2)........................................................................................................ 420 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 427 General Specifications.............................................................................................. 427 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears................................................................................... 427 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 427 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 427 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up........................................................ 428 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 428 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 428 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up............................................................ 428 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 428 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 428 Stall Speed......................................................................................................... 429 Line Pressure....................................................................................................... 429 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 429 Turbine Revolution Sensor........................................................................................... 429 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)........................................................................ 429 Reverse Brake....................................................................................................... 429 Total End Play...................................................................................................... 430 BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY....................................................................... 430 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 atc............................................................................................................................. 432 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 432 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 436 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 436 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...................................................................... 436 CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT........................................................................................ 436 General Refrigerant Precautions..................................................................................... 438 Lubricant Precautions............................................................................................... 438 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection.............................................................................. 439 ABOUT ONE-TOUCH JOINT........................................................................................... 439 Description................................................................................................. 439 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..................................................................... 441 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION............................................................................... 442 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 442 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 442 O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications...................................................................... 443 Precautions for Servicing Compressor................................................................................ 444 Precautions for Service Equipment................................................................................... 444 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 444 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR........................................................................................ 444 VACUUM PUMP..................................................................................................... 445 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET.............................................................................................. 445 SERVICE HOSES................................................................................................... 445 SERVICE COUPLERS................................................................................................ 446 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE........................................................................................ 446 CHARGING CYLINDER............................................................................................... 446 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye.................................................................................. 447 IDENTIFICATION.................................................................................................. 447 IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE................................................................................ 447 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 447 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 448 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 448 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment....................................................................... 449 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 451 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 452 Refrigerant Cycle................................................................................................... 452 REFRIGERANT FLOW................................................................................................ 452 FREEZE PROTECTION............................................................................................... 452 Refrigerant System Protection....................................................................................... 452 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................................................................................... 452 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................... 452 V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor................................................................................ 453 GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................. 453 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 454 General..................................................................................................... 454 Operation................................................................................................... 455 Component Layout.................................................................................................... 457 LUBRICANT............................................................................................................... 458 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor..................................................................... 458 LUBRICANT....................................................................................................... 458 LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION...................................................................................... 458 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR...................................... 459 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ 460 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL................................................................................................. 461 Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System................................................................... 461 System Construction................................................................................................. 461 OPERATION....................................................................................................... 461 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER........................................................................ 462 Start:...................................................................................................... 462 Address:.................................................................................................... 462 Opening Angle:.............................................................................................. 462 Error Check:................................................................................................ 462 Stop Signal:................................................................................................ 463 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)............................................................ 463 FAN SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................... 463 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 463 OUTLET DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 463 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL........................................................................................... 464 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 464 Description of Control System....................................................................................... 465 Control Operation................................................................................................... 465 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................. 466 AUTO SWITCH..................................................................................................... 466 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (DRIVER SIDE)................................................. 466 TEMPERATURE SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (PASSENGER SIDE).............................................. 466 RECIRCULATION (REC) SWITCH...................................................................................... 466 FRESH (FRE) SWITCH.............................................................................................. 466 DEFROSTER (DEF) SWITCH.......................................................................................... 466 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH..................................................................................... 466 OFF SWITCH...................................................................................................... 466 A/C SWITCH...................................................................................................... 466 MODE SWITCH..................................................................................................... 466 FAN SWITCH...................................................................................................... 466 DUAL SWITCH (WITH LEFT AND RIGHT VENTILATION TEMPERATURE SEPARATELY CONTROL SYSTEM)............................. 466 Fail-safe Function.................................................................................................. 467 Discharge Air Flow.................................................................................................. 468 System Description.................................................................................................. 469 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................................. 469 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 470 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 471 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 471 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................... 471 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 472 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 472 Display Item List........................................................................................... 472 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 473 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 473 SYMPTOM TABLE................................................................................................... 473 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 474 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................. 474 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT........................................................................................... 475 Schematic........................................................................................................... 476 Wiring Diagram —A/C—................................................................................................ 477 Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value............................................................................. 482 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 482 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP..................................................... 482 Self-diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 484 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 484 FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 485 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER................................................................ 490 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER.............................................................. 491 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION................................................................. 491 Operational Check................................................................................................... 492 CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION........................................................................................ 492 CHECKING BLOWER................................................................................................. 492 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR.......................................................................................... 492 CHECKING RECIRCULATION.......................................................................................... 493 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE................................................................................... 493 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE................................................................................... 493 CHECK A/C SWITCH................................................................................................ 493 CHECKING AUTO MODE.............................................................................................. 494 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp........................................................................ 494 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 494 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 495 Unified Meter and A/C amp. (Automatic Amplifier)............................................................ 495 Potentio Temperature Control (PTC).......................................................................... 495 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM............................................................................. 495 LAN System Circuit.................................................................................................. 497 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT............................................................................ 497 Mode Door Motor Circuit............................................................................................. 501 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 501 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 502 Component Parts............................................................................................. 502 System Operation............................................................................................ 502 Mode Door Control Specification............................................................................. 503 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 503 Mode Door Motor............................................................................................. 503 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR........................................................................ 503 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit.......................................................................................... 504 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 504 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 505 Component Parts............................................................................................. 505 System Operation............................................................................................ 505 Air Mix Door Control Specification.......................................................................... 505 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 506 Air Mix Door Motor.......................................................................................... 506 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR........................................................................... 506 Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit...................................................................................... 506 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR PBR....................................................................... 506 Intake Door Motor Circuit........................................................................................... 507 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 507 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 508 Component Parts............................................................................................. 508 System Operation............................................................................................ 508 Intake Door Control Specification........................................................................... 508 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 509 Intake Door Motor........................................................................................... 509 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR...................................................................... 509 Blower Motor Circuit................................................................................................ 510 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 510 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 511 Component Parts............................................................................................. 511 System Operation............................................................................................ 511 Automatic Mode.............................................................................................. 511 Starting Fan Speed Control.................................................................................. 512 Blower Speed Compensation................................................................................... 512 Fan Speed Control Specification............................................................................. 512 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 512 Brush-less Motor............................................................................................ 512 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR........................................................................... 512 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 514 Blower Motor................................................................................................ 514 Magnet Clutch Circuit............................................................................................... 515 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 515 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 516 Low Temperature Protection Control.......................................................................... 516 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH.......................................................................... 516 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 521 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor................................................................................. 521 Insufficient Cooling................................................................................................ 522 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 522 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................... 524 PERFORMANCE CHART............................................................................................... 526 Test Condition.............................................................................................. 526 Test Reading................................................................................................ 526 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE.......................................................................... 527 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.............................................................. 527 High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low............................................. 527 High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High............................................. 528 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low............................................................... 528 Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative................................................................ 529 Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.......................................................................... 529 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING................................................................... 529 Insufficient Heating................................................................................................ 531 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 531 Noise............................................................................................................... 532 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 532 Self-diagnosis...................................................................................................... 533 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 533 Memory Function..................................................................................................... 534 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 534 Ambient Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 535 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 535 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 535 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS............................................................................... 535 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR......................................................................... 535 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 537 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 537 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit........................................................................................... 538 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 538 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 538 Aspirator................................................................................................... 538 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR...................................................................... 539 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 540 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 540 Sunload Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 541 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 541 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 541 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS........................................................................................... 541 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR......................................................................... 541 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 543 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 543 Intake Sensor Circuit............................................................................................... 544 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 544 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 544 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR.......................................................................... 544 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 545 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 545 CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................. 546 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 546 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 546 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 546 AUTO AMP................................................................................................................ 547 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp............................................................... 547 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 547 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 547 AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 548 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 548 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 548 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 548 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................................................... 549 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 549 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 549 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 549 SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 550 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 550 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 550 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 550 INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................................................... 551 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 551 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 551 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 551 BLOWER UNIT............................................................................................................. 552 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 552 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 552 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 552 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 553 BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................................................ 554 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 554 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 554 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 554 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................................................... 555 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 555 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 555 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 555 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER.................................................................................................... 556 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 556 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 556 REPLACEMENT TIMING.............................................................................................. 556 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES.......................................................................................... 556 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................... 557 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 557 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 557 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 558 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 559 MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................................................... 561 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 561 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 561 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 561 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................................................... 562 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 562 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 562 Driver Side................................................................................................. 562 Passenger Side.............................................................................................. 562 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 562 HEATER CORE............................................................................................................. 563 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 563 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 563 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 563 DUCTS AND GRILLES....................................................................................................... 564 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 564 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 564 Removal of Center Ventilator Grille......................................................................... 564 Removal of Side Ventilation................................................................................. 564 Removal of Rear Ventilator Grille........................................................................... 564 Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Ducts and Ventilator Ducts..................................................... 565 Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts............................................................................ 566 Removal of Foot Ducts....................................................................................... 567 Removal of Floor Ducts...................................................................................... 567 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 567 REFRIGERANT LINES....................................................................................................... 568 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure................................................................................. 568 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.......................................................................... 568 Discharging Refrigerant..................................................................................... 568 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant.................................................................. 568 Components.......................................................................................................... 570 VK45DE.......................................................................................................... 570 VQ35DE.......................................................................................................... 571 Removal and Installation of Compressor.............................................................................. 571 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 571 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 571 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 572 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 573 Removal and Installation of......................................................................................... 574 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 574 Overhaul.................................................................................................... 574 Inspection.................................................................................................. 575 Coil........................................................................................................ 575 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 576 Break-in Operation.......................................................................................... 577 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose.............................................................. 578 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 578 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 579 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible Hose............................................................. 579 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 579 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 580 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 1 (Engine Compartment)................................................ 580 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 580 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 581 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe 1 and 2 (Engine Compartment)......................................... 581 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 581 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 582 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 2 and High-pressure Pipe 3............................................ 582 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 582 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 583 Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank............................................................................. 584 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 584 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 584 Removal and Installation of Condenser............................................................................... 585 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 585 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 585 Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor............................................................. 586 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 586 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 586 Removal and Installation of Evaporator.............................................................................. 586 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 586 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 586 Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve......................................................................... 587 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 587 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 587 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...................................................................................... 588 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector....................................................... 588 Dye Injection....................................................................................................... 588 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector................................................................................ 589 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR.......................................................................... 589 CHECKING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 590 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 592 Compressor.......................................................................................................... 592 Lubricant........................................................................................................... 592 Refrigerant......................................................................................................... 592 Engine Idling Speed................................................................................................. 592 Belt Tension........................................................................................................ 592 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 av.............................................................................................................................. 594 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 594 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 598 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 598 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis............................................................................... 598 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 599 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 599 AUDIO................................................................................................................... 600 System Description.................................................................................................. 600 BASE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 600 BOSE SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 600 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM................................................................................... 601 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 602 Schematic -Base System-............................................................................................. 603 WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 603 WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................... 604 Wiring Diagram -AUDIO- / Base System................................................................................ 605 Schematic -BOSE System-............................................................................................. 612 WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 612 WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................... 613 Wiring Diagram -AUDIO- / BOSE System................................................................................ 614 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 623 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.................................................................. 624 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 626 Terminals and Reference Value for Woofer............................................................................ 627 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 628 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 628 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 628 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 628 Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................................... 628 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO, TAPE AND CD (BASE SYSTEM)............................................................... 628 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO, TAPE AND CD (BOSE SYSTEM)............................................................... 629 FOR RADIO ONLY.................................................................................................. 630 FOR CASSETTE PLAYER ONLY........................................................................................ 630 FOR CD ONLY..................................................................................................... 630 Noise Inspection.................................................................................................... 631 TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE................................................................................ 631 Power Supply Circuit Inspection..................................................................................... 632 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 633 A/C and AV Switch Inspection........................................................................................ 634 BOSE Speaker Amp. Inspection........................................................................................ 635 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 635 Locking CD Auto-changer Mechanism................................................................................... 637 DAMPER LOCK PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 637 Removal and Installation of Audio Unit.............................................................................. 637 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 637 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 637 Disassembly and Assembly for Audio Unit............................................................................. 638 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 638 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 638 Removal and Installation for A/C and AV Switch...................................................................... 638 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 638 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 639 Removal and Installation for Front Door Speaker..................................................................... 639 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 639 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 639 Removal and Installation for Rear Door Speaker...................................................................... 639 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 639 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 639 Removal and Installation for Instrument Speaker..................................................................... 640 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 640 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 640 Removal and Installation for Tweeter................................................................................ 640 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 640 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 640 Removal and Installation for Woofer (BOSE System)................................................................... 640 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 640 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 640 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp....................................................................... 641 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 641 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 641 AUDIO ANTENNA........................................................................................................... 642 System Description.................................................................................................. 642 Wiring Diagram — M/ANT —............................................................................................ 643 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 644 Antenna Amp. Inspection............................................................................................. 644 Location of Antenna................................................................................................. 645 Window Antenna Repair............................................................................................... 645 CHECK ELEMENT................................................................................................... 645 Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna............................................................................ 647 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 647 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 647 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM............................................................................................... 648 System Description.................................................................................................. 648 A/C AND AV SWITCH SYSTEM........................................................................................ 648 PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR....................................................................................... 648 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND......................................................................................... 648 DRIVE COMPUTER.................................................................................................. 649 TRIP Switch................................................................................................. 649 FUEL ECON Switch............................................................................................ 649 MAINT Switch (Maintenance Switch)........................................................................... 650 E/M SWITCH...................................................................................................... 650 SETTING SCREEN.................................................................................................. 651 Adjustable Vehicle Status................................................................................... 651 D/N SCREEN.................................................................................................. 652 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 652 AV COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................... 652 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 653 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 654 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 654 Schematic........................................................................................................... 655 Wiring Diagram — INF/D —............................................................................................ 656 Schematic........................................................................................................... 661 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 662 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit...................................................................... 665 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 666 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 667 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 667 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 667 Self-Diagnosis Mode................................................................................................. 667 OPERATION PROCEDURES............................................................................................ 667 NETWORK CHECK................................................................................................... 668 PARTS CHECK..................................................................................................... 669 DISPLAY DETAIL SCREEN....................................................................................... 669 HVAC DETAIL SCREEN.............................................................................................. 669 VERSION CHECK................................................................................................... 669 CAN DIAG MNTR (CAN DIAG MONITOR)................................................................................ 669 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 670 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 670 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 670 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 670 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 671 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit.............................................................. 672 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 673 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 673 Illumination Signal Inspection...................................................................................... 674 Ignition Signal Inspection.......................................................................................... 675 Audio Communication Line Inspection................................................................................. 675 A/C and AV Switch Does Not Operate.................................................................................. 677 CAN Communication Line Inspection................................................................................... 678 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 678 Removal and Installation of Display................................................................................. 680 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 680 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 680 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 680 NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 681 System Description.................................................................................................. 681 TRAVEL DISTANCE................................................................................................. 681 TRAVEL DIRECTION................................................................................................ 681 MAP-MATCHING.................................................................................................... 681 GPS (GLOBALPOSITIONING SYSTEM)................................................................................. 682 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 683 NAVI Control Unit........................................................................................... 683 DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................... 683 Map DVD-ROM................................................................................................. 683 Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)................................................................................. 683 BIRDVIEW........................................................................................................ 683 Description................................................................................................. 684 MAP DISPLAY..................................................................................................... 684 FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH....................................................................................... 685 Display with Pushed “DEST” Button........................................................................... 685 Display with Pushed “ROUTE” Button.......................................................................... 686 Display with Pushed “SETTING” Button........................................................................ 687 Display Settings............................................................................................ 687 Brightness/Contrast/Map Back Ground......................................................................... 687 Display Off................................................................................................. 687 Setting of the Under Section Display........................................................................ 687 Vehicle Electronic Systems.................................................................................. 688 Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle..................................................................... 688 Lift Steering Column When Exiting Vehicle................................................................... 688 Selective Door Unlock (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 689 Keyless Remote Response -Horn............................................................................... 689 Keyless Remote Response -Lights............................................................................. 689 Auto Re-Lock Time........................................................................................... 689 Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights......................................................................... 689 Automatic Headlights Off Delay.............................................................................. 689 Speed Dependent Wiper....................................................................................... 689 Intelligent Key Lock Response-Sound......................................................................... 689 Intelligent Key Unlock Response-Beep Sound.................................................................. 689 Intelligent Key Engine Start Function....................................................................... 689 Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock Function........................................................................ 689 Return All Settings to Default.............................................................................. 689 System Settings............................................................................................. 690 Language Setting............................................................................................ 690 Beep Setting................................................................................................ 690 Navigation Settings......................................................................................... 691 “VIEW” MODE..................................................................................................... 691 “HEADING” MODE.................................................................................................. 692 “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE..................................................................................... 692 “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................... 692 “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE.................................................................................. 692 “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE............................................................................................ 693 “AVOID AREA SETTING” MODE....................................................................................... 693 “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE............................................................................................. 693 “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE........................................................................................ 694 “GPS INFORMATION” MODE.......................................................................................... 694 “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE.............................................................................. 694 “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE........................................................................................ 694 “TRACKING” MODE................................................................................................. 695 GUIDANCE VOLUME................................................................................................. 695 Description................................................................................................. 695 Activation/Deactivation Setting............................................................................. 695 Voice Volume Setting........................................................................................ 695 DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON............................................................................... 695 TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2................................................................................................ 696 FUEL ECONOMY.................................................................................................... 696 MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................... 696 ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION..................................................................................... 696 TIRE PRESSURE................................................................................................... 697 WARNING INDICATIONS............................................................................................. 697 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 698 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 698 Component Parts Location and Harness Connector Location............................................................. 698 Schematic—NAVI—..................................................................................................... 699 Wiring Diagram —NAVI—............................................................................................... 700 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 708 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 709 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit................................................................. 714 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 716 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 720 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 722 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 723 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 723 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 723 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 724 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 724 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 726 Quick reference table....................................................................................... 726 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 726 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI).......................................................................................... 726 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 726 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 728 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 728 Self-diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 728 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 729 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 729 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 729 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 730 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 730 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 731 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 731 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 732 HISTORY OF ERRORS............................................................................................... 732 DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS.................................................................................. 733 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 734 Display Longitude & Latitude................................................................................ 735 Angle Adjustment............................................................................................ 735 Speed Calibration........................................................................................... 735 Initialize Location......................................................................................... 735 Can Diag Support Monitor............................................................................................ 736 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 736 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 737 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 737 Starting the SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE............................................................................ 737 Diagnosis Function.......................................................................................... 737 Exiting the SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE............................................................................. 737 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................... 738 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit...................................................... 739 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display................................................................... 740 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for A/C and AV Switch......................................................... 742 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.................................................................... 742 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit................................................................. 743 Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit..................................................................... 744 Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.................................................................. 745 Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit......................................................................... 745 Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit...................................................................... 745 Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.......................................................................... 745 Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit....................................................................... 746 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit................................... 746 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit.......................................... 747 When Malfunctioning Connection Between Display Control Unit and Display............................................. 749 CAN Communication Line Check........................................................................................ 751 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is not Inserted....................................................... 751 If NAVI Control Unit Detects that Inserted DVD-ROM Map Malfunctioning or if it is Impossible to L................... 751 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning........................................... 752 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)......................................................... 752 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)........................................................ 753 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 754 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All screens Looks Bluish)......................................................... 755 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Reddish)........................................................ 756 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Looks Yellowish)...................................................... 757 NAVI Screen is Rolling.............................................................................................. 759 Guide Sound is Not Heard............................................................................................ 760 Screen is Not Shown................................................................................................. 760 Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen........................................ 761 TRIP, FUEL ECON and MAINTENANCE Screens are Not Shown............................................................... 762 Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“***” is Shown)........................................................ 762 Driving Distance or Average Speed is Not Shown (“***” is Shown)..................................................... 763 WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown............................................................................... 763 TIRE PRESSURE Screen is not Shown................................................................................... 763 Unable to Operate All of A/C and AV switch (Unable to start Self-Diagnosis)......................................... 764 Position of Current-Location Mark is Not Correct.................................................................... 765 Driving Test........................................................................................................ 765 Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction.......................................................................... 766 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................. 766 VEHICLE MARK.................................................................................................... 766 DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET.............................................. 767 VOICE GUIDE..................................................................................................... 768 ROUTE SEARCH.................................................................................................... 768 EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT.................................................................. 769 CURRENT LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG................................................ 772 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS..................................................................................... 772 CURRENT LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA...................................................................... 773 WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS ............... 773 LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW..................................................................... 773 ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION....................... 773 NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED.......................................................................... 773 CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN.............................................. 773 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit................................................................................ 774 Removal and Installation of NAVI control Unit....................................................................... 775 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 775 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 775 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna............................................................................. 775 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 775 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 775 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 776 Removal and Installation of Display Unit............................................................................ 776 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 776 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 776 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 776 INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................... 777 System Description.................................................................................................. 777 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 778 Wiring Diagram – MES –.............................................................................................. 779 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Player........................................................................ 781 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Display....................................................................... 782 DVD Player Is Not Work.............................................................................................. 784 Screen Is Not Shown (While Sounds Come Out of an Audio Speaker, Did not do of a Head Phone)......................... 786 Screen is not Shown (Sounds Come Out of Both an Audio Speaker and a Head Phone)..................................... 787 Head Phone Does Not Sound........................................................................................... 788 Remote Controller Is Not Work....................................................................................... 789 No CD·DVD Sound From All Speakers................................................................................... 790 Removal and Installation for DVD Player............................................................................. 791 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 791 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 792 Removal and Installation for DVD Display Unit....................................................................... 792 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 792 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 793 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 bcs............................................................................................................................. 794 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 794 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 795 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 795 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................................................................................... 796 System Description.................................................................................................. 796 BCM FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 796 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION............................................................................. 796 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL....................................................................................... 798 BCM STATUS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 799 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY.............................................................................. 800 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 800 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND COMBINATION METER................................................................. 800 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 800 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................. 801 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 802 Schematic........................................................................................................... 803 CONSULT-II.......................................................................................................... 805 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 805 ITEMS OF EACH PART.............................................................................................. 806 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 807 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 807 Display Item List........................................................................................... 807 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)...................................................... 807 Removal and Installation of BCM..................................................................................... 808 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 808 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 808 bl.............................................................................................................................. 810 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 810 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 814 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 814 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 814 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 814 Precautions for Work................................................................................................ 814 Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis.............................................................................. 815 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 816 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 816 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 816 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................... 817 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 817 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW.............................................................................................. 817 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE.............................................................................. 818 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................. 818 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE.................................................................... 818 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................ 818 CONFIRM THE REPAIR.............................................................................................. 819 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting........................................................................... 819 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................ 819 CENTER CONSOLE.................................................................................................. 819 DOORS........................................................................................................... 819 TRUNK........................................................................................................... 820 SUNROOF/HEADLINING.............................................................................................. 820 SEATS........................................................................................................... 820 UNDERHOOD....................................................................................................... 820 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................ 821 HOOD.................................................................................................................... 823 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 823 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT................................................................... 823 FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 823 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 823 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly........................................................................... 824 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 825 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 825 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control....................................................................... 825 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 825 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 826 Hood Lock Control Inspection........................................................................................ 826 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT................................................................................................... 828 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 828 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 828 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 829 FRONT FENDER............................................................................................................ 830 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 830 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 830 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 830 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 831 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 831 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 832 System Description.................................................................................................. 832 OUTLINE......................................................................................................... 833 Functions Available by Operating the Door Lock and Unlock Switches on Driver's Door and Passenger........... 833 Functions Available by Operating the Key Cylinder Switch on Driver's........................................ 833 Select Unlock Operation..................................................................................... 833 Key Reminder Door System.................................................................................... 834 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 834 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 834 Schematic (With Intelligent Key).................................................................................... 835 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK- (With Intelligent Key)...................................................................... 836 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 836 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 837 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 838 FIG. 4.......................................................................................................... 839 FIG. 5.......................................................................................................... 840 Schematic (Without Intelligent Key)................................................................................. 841 Wiring Diagram -D/LOCK- (Without Intelligent Key)................................................................... 842 FIG. 6.......................................................................................................... 842 FIG. 7.......................................................................................................... 843 FIG. 8.......................................................................................................... 844 FIG. 9.......................................................................................................... 845 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 846 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit (With Intelligent Key System)................................ 846 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 846 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 847 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK CHECK..................................................................................... 847 CONSULT-II Function................................................................................................. 848 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 848 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 849 Work Support................................................................................................ 849 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 849 Active Test................................................................................................. 849 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 850 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 851 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 851 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 853 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 855 Check Door Lock and Unlock Switch................................................................................... 857 Check Door Lock Actuator (Driver side).............................................................................. 859 Check Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side and Rear LH/RH)............................................................ 860 Check Fuel Lid Opener Actuator...................................................................................... 861 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Lock)......................................................................... 862 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Unlock)....................................................................... 863 Check Select Unlock Relay Circuit................................................................................... 864 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM............................................................................................. 865 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 865 System Description.................................................................................................. 866 INPUTS.......................................................................................................... 866 OPERATED PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 867 Power Door Lock Operation................................................................................... 867 Hazard and Horn Reminder.................................................................................... 867 Auto Door Lock Operation.................................................................................... 867 Panic Alarm Operation....................................................................................... 868 Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation.................................................................. 868 Room Lamp and Ignition Key ring Illumination Operation...................................................... 868 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 868 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 868 Schematic........................................................................................................... 869 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES—............................................................................................ 870 FIG. 1.......................................................................................................... 870 FIG. 2.......................................................................................................... 871 FIG. 3.......................................................................................................... 872 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 873 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 874 CONSULT-II Function................................................................................................. 874 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 874 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 875 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 875 Active Test................................................................................................. 876 Work Support................................................................................................ 876 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 877 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 878 Check Key Fob Battery and Function.................................................................................. 880 Check ACC Switch.................................................................................................... 881 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 882 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 882 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 884 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 886 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 887 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 888 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 888 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 888 Check Map Lamp and Ignition Keyhole Illumination Function........................................................... 888 ID Code Entry Procedure............................................................................................. 889 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................... 889 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................................ 891 Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................................................................... 892 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 893 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 893 System Description.................................................................................................. 895 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 895 Operation Description....................................................................................... 895 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 896 Auto Door Lock Function..................................................................................... 896 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 896 Intelligent Key Lock-in Prevention Function................................................................. 896 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. 896 Door Lock Function.......................................................................................... 896 Map Lamp And Keyhole Illumination Function.................................................................. 897 Panic Alarm Function........................................................................................ 897 Remote Control Power Window Down (open) Operation........................................................... 897 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 897 ENGINE STARTUP FUNCTION......................................................................................... 897 Operation Description....................................................................................... 897 Operation Range............................................................................................. 897 Active Check Function....................................................................................... 898 WARNING AND ALARM FUNCTION...................................................................................... 898 Operation Description....................................................................................... 898 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 898 Warning Procedure........................................................................................... 899 CHANGE SETTINGS FUNCTION........................................................................................ 901 Changing Settings With the Intelligent Key.................................................................. 901 Changing Settings Using CONSULT-II.......................................................................... 901 Changing Settings Using Display Unit........................................................................ 901 INTELLIGENT KEY REGISTRATION.................................................................................... 901 STEERING LOCK UNIT REGISTRATION................................................................................. 901 Steering Lock Unit ID Registration.......................................................................... 901 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 902 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 902 Schematic........................................................................................................... 903 Wiring Diagram — I/KEY—............................................................................................. 905 Terminals and Reference Value for INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 918 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock unit................................................................ 920 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 920 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 921 Diagnosis Procedure................................................................................................. 922 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 922 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................ 923 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..................................................................................... 923 BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................. 923 CONSULT-II Application Items........................................................................................ 924 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 924 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS......................................................................................... 924 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 924 MAIN SIGNALS Display Item................................................................................... 924 ACTIVE TEST..................................................................................................... 925 List of Operation Related Parts..................................................................................... 926 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart..................................................................................... 927 ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE INTELLIGENT KEY ARE NOT OPERATING.......................................................... 927 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTION MALFUNCTION....................................................................... 927 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.................................................................................. 928 ENGINE START FUNCTION MALFUNCTION............................................................................... 929 Intelligent Key Operation Inspection........................................................................ 929 Mechanical Key Operation Inspection......................................................................... 929 WARNING CHIME FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.............................................................................. 929 Check CAN Communication System Inspection........................................................................... 932 Check Intelligent Key Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit.......................................................... 933 Check Key Switch (Intelligent Key Unit Input)....................................................................... 933 Check Key Switch (BCM Input)........................................................................................ 935 Check Ignition Knob Switch.......................................................................................... 936 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 937 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 937 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 938 Check Unlock Sensor................................................................................................. 940 Check Door Request Switch........................................................................................... 941 Check Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer................................................................................ 943 Check Outside Key Antenna........................................................................................... 944 Check Inside Key Antenna............................................................................................ 947 Check Steering Lock Unit............................................................................................ 948 Check Stop Lamp Switch.............................................................................................. 950 Check Detention Switch.............................................................................................. 951 Check Select Unlock Relay........................................................................................... 953 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 954 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 954 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 954 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 954 Removal and Installation of Intelligent Key Unit.................................................................... 955 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 955 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 955 Intelligent Key Inspection.......................................................................................... 956 INTELLIGENT KEY DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY........................................................................ 956 REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY INSPECTION............................................................................ 956 DOOR.................................................................................................................... 957 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 957 FRONT DOOR...................................................................................................... 957 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 957 REAR DOOR....................................................................................................... 957 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 957 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 958 Removal and Installation of Front Door.............................................................................. 958 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 958 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 959 Removal and Installation of Rear Door............................................................................... 959 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 959 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 960 Removal and Installation of Door Weathers trip...................................................................... 960 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 960 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 960 FRONT DOOR LOCK......................................................................................................... 961 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 961 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 961 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 963 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 964 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY...................................................................................... 964 REAR DOOR LOCK.......................................................................................................... 965 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 965 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 965 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 967 BACK DOOR............................................................................................................... 968 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 968 VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................... 968 Back Door Assembly.................................................................................................. 968 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 968 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 969 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 969 Removal and Installation of Back Door Striker....................................................................... 969 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 969 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 969 Removal and Installation of Back Door Stay.......................................................................... 970 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 970 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 970 Removal and Installation of Dave Tail Male & Female................................................................. 970 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 970 Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip.................................................................. 971 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 971 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 971 BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY................................................................................................. 972 Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock & Closure Assembly....................................................... 972 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 972 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 972 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 972 Removal and Installation of Back Door Opener Switch................................................................. 972 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 972 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 973 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 973 BACK DOOR LOCK & CLOSURE ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 973 BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE SYSTEM........................................................................................... 974 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 974 System Description.................................................................................................. 974 CLOSE OPERATION................................................................................................. 974 NON-OPERATION CONDITION......................................................................................... 974 OPEN OPERATION.................................................................................................. 975 Wiring Diagram — B/CLOS —........................................................................................... 976 Terminals and Reference Value for Back Door Closure Control Unit.................................................... 978 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 979 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 979 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 979 Back Door Closure Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check................................................ 980 Half-Latch Switch Check............................................................................................. 980 Close Switch Check.................................................................................................. 982 Open Switch Check................................................................................................... 983 Back Door Opener Switch Check (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 984 Back Door Opener Switch Check (Without Intelligent Key)............................................................. 986 Unlock Sensor Check (Without Intelligent Key)....................................................................... 988 Closure Motor Check................................................................................................. 989 Removal and Installation of Back Door Closer Control Unit........................................................... 989 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM................................................................................. 990 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 990 System Description.................................................................................................. 991 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 991 Operation Flow.............................................................................................. 991 Setting the Vehicle Security System......................................................................... 991 Canceling the Set Vehicle Security System................................................................... 992 Canceling the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System................................................ 992 Activating the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System............................................... 992 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................................... 992 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM........................................................................ 992 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION......................................................................... 993 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION............................................................................ 993 PANIC ALARM OPERATION........................................................................................... 993 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 994 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 994 Schematic........................................................................................................... 995 Wiring Diagram -VEHSEC-............................................................................................. 996 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1001 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1001 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................1002 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM.....................................................................................1003 Work Support................................................................................................1003 Data Monitor................................................................................................1003 Active Test.................................................................................................1003 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1004 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1004 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1005 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1006 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1007 1 – 1 DOOR SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1007 1 – 2 HOOD SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1009 1 – 3 BACK DOOR SWITCH CHECK....................................................................................1011 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1013 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK...................................................................................1013 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1014 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK............................................................................1014 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1014 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK...............................................................................1014 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1014 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK...........................................................................1014 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1014 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK...............................................................................1014 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).........................................................................1015 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1015 System Description..................................................................................................1015 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1015 SECURITY INDICATOR..............................................................................................1016 Condition of Security Indicator.............................................................................1016 System Composition..................................................................................................1017 ECM Re-communicating Function.......................................................................................1017 Wiring Diagram – NATS –.............................................................................................1018 MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM..............................................................................1018 MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM...........................................................................1020 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock Unit/with Intelligent Key System....................................1021 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit/with Intelligent Key System..................................1021 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1022 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................1023 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................1023 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION........................................................................1024 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.............................................................................1024 NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART..........................................................................1025 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1026 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1026 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1027 Security Indicator Inspection.......................................................................................1027 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1028 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1029 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1030 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1031 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1032 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1033 Diagnostic Procedure 7..............................................................................................1035 Removal and Installation NATS Antenna Amp...........................................................................1036 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1036 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1036 INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER.........................................................................................1037 Wiring Diagram —TRNSCV—.............................................................................................1037 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................................................................1038 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................1038 SYMPTOM: Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver.............................................................1038 BODY REPAIR.............................................................................................................1040 Body Exterior Paint Color...........................................................................................1040 Body Component Parts................................................................................................1041 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS.......................................................................................1041 BODY COMPONENT PARTS............................................................................................1043 Corrosion Protection................................................................................................1045 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1045 Anti-corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel).........................................................1045 Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer...........................................1045 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX..............................................................................................1046 UNDERCOATING....................................................................................................1047 Precautions in Undercoating.................................................................................1047 STONE GUARD COAT................................................................................................1048 Body Sealing........................................................................................................1049 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1049 Body Construction...................................................................................................1052 BODY CONSTRUCTION...............................................................................................1052 Body Alignment......................................................................................................1053 BODY CENTER MARKS...............................................................................................1053 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS......................................................................................1054 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1055 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................1056 Measurement.................................................................................................1056 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1057 UNDERBODY.......................................................................................................1058 Measurement.................................................................................................1058 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1059 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................1060 Measurement.................................................................................................1060 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1061 REAR BODY.......................................................................................................1062 Measurement.................................................................................................1062 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1063 Handling Precautions For Plastics...................................................................................1064 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS...............................................................................1064 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS......................................................................................1065 Precautions In Repairing High Strength Steel........................................................................1067 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES...............................................................1067 Read the Following Precautions When Repairing HSS:..........................................................1068 Replacement Operations..............................................................................................1070 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1070 HOODLEDGE.......................................................................................................1073 FRONT SIDE MEMBER...............................................................................................1075 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT).........................................................................1077 FRONT PILLAR....................................................................................................1079 CENTER PILLAR...................................................................................................1081 OUTER SILL......................................................................................................1083 REAR FENDER.....................................................................................................1085 REAR PANEL......................................................................................................1087 REAR END CROSSMEMBER............................................................................................1089 REAR FLOOR REAR.................................................................................................1091 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION......................................................................................1094 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 br..............................................................................................................................1096 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1096 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................1098 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1098 Precautions for Brake System........................................................................................1098 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................1099 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................1099 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................1100 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1100 BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................1101 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................1101 PLAY AND CLEARANCE BETWEEN BRAKE PEDAL AND FLOOR PANEL WITH PEDAL DEPRESSED.....................................1101 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................1102 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1102 COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION........................................................................................1102 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1103 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1103 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1103 BRAKE FLUID.............................................................................................................1104 On-board Inspection.................................................................................................1104 LEVEL CHECK.....................................................................................................1104 Drain and Refill....................................................................................................1104 Bleeding Brake System...............................................................................................1105 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE...................................................................................................1106 Hydraulic Circuit...................................................................................................1106 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose.......................................................1106 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1106 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1106 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose........................................................1107 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1107 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1107 Inspection After Installation.......................................................................................1107 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...................................................................................................1108 On-board Inspection.................................................................................................1108 LEAK INSPECTION.................................................................................................1108 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1108 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1108 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1108 Components..........................................................................................................1108 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1109 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1109 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1109 BRAKE BOOSTER...........................................................................................................1110 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................1110 OPERATING CHECK.................................................................................................1110 AIRTIGHT CHECK..................................................................................................1110 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1111 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1111 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1111 Output Rod Length Inspection................................................................................1111 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1112 VACUUM LINES............................................................................................................1113 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1113 Inspection..........................................................................................................1113 VISUAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................1113 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION..........................................................................................1114 Airtightness Inspection.....................................................................................1114 FRONT DISC BRAKE........................................................................................................1115 On-vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1115 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1115 Components..........................................................................................................1115 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1116 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1116 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1116 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1116 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1116 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1116 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1117 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1117 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1118 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1118 Torque Member...............................................................................................1118 Piston......................................................................................................1118 Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots.........................................................................1118 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1118 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1119 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1119 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1119 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1119 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1119 REAR DISC BRAKE.........................................................................................................1120 On-vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1120 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1120 Components..........................................................................................................1120 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1121 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1121 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1122 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1122 CALIPER INSPECTION..............................................................................................1122 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1122 Torque Member...............................................................................................1123 Piston......................................................................................................1123 Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots.....................................................................1123 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1123 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1124 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1124 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1124 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1124 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE......................................................................................1124 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................1126 General Specifications..............................................................................................1126 Brake Pedal.........................................................................................................1126 Brake Booster.......................................................................................................1126 Check Valve.........................................................................................................1126 Front Disc Brake....................................................................................................1126 Rear Disc Brake.....................................................................................................1127 brc.............................................................................................................................1128 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1128 VDC/TCS/ABS.............................................................................................................1130 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1130 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1130 Precautions for Brake System....................................................................................1130 Precautions for Brake Control...................................................................................1130 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1132 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1132 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1132 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE..................................................................................................1133 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position............................................................1133 Calibration of Decel G-sensor (AWD Model).......................................................................1133 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1135 System Diagram..................................................................................................1135 VDC Function....................................................................................................1135 TCS Function....................................................................................................1135 ABS Function....................................................................................................1135 EBD Function....................................................................................................1136 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1136 VDC / TCS SYSTEM............................................................................................1136 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1136 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1137 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1138 System Description..............................................................................................1138 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1139 How to Proceed With Diagnosis...................................................................................1139 BASIC CONCEPT...............................................................................................1139 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART.........................................................................................1140 ASKING COMPLAINTS...........................................................................................1141 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET..................................................................................1141 Component Installation Location.................................................................................1142 Schematic.......................................................................................................1143 Wiring Diagram — VDC —..........................................................................................1144 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard.......................................................................1150 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II.............................................................................1150 CONSULT-II Functions............................................................................................1152 CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION....................................................................................1152 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE........................................................................1153 SELF-DIAGNOSIS..............................................................................................1154 Description.............................................................................................1154 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1154 Display Item List.......................................................................................1155 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................1157 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1157 Display Item List.......................................................................................1158 ACTIVE TEST.................................................................................................1160 Operation Procedure.....................................................................................1160 Solenoid Valve Operation Chart..........................................................................1160 ABS Motor...............................................................................................1161 For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis.................................................................................1162 PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................1162 ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp, VDCOFF Indicator Lamp, SLIP Indicator Lamp, Brake Warnin.......1163 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1163 BASIC INSPECTION 1: BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION....................................1163 BASIC INSPECTION 2: POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION..................................1163 BASIC INSPECTION 3: ABS WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP and BRAKE WARNI...........1164 Inspection 1: Wheel Sensor System...............................................................................1164 Inspection 2: Engine System.....................................................................................1166 Inspection 3: VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit System...................................................................1167 Inspection 4: Pressure Sensor System............................................................................1167 Inspection 5: Steering Angle Sensor System......................................................................1169 Inspection 6: Yaw Rate/Side G-Sensor (2WD model), Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G- sensor (AWD models) System.............1171 Inspection 7: Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System.........................................................1173 Inspection 8: Actuator Motor System.............................................................................1174 Inspection 9: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground System......................1175 Inspection 10: Stop Lamp Switch System..........................................................................1177 Inspection 11: Brake Fluid Level Switch System..................................................................1178 Inspection 12: When “ST ANG SEN SIGNAL” Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display...............................1179 Inspection 13: When “DECEL G SEN SET” Appears on Self-Diagnosis Results Display (AWD Model).....................1179 Inspection 14: CAN Communication System.........................................................................1180 Component Inspection............................................................................................1180 VDC OFF SWITCH..............................................................................................1180 Symptom 1: Excessive ABS Function Operation Frequency...........................................................1180 Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction............................................................................1181 Symptom 3: The Braking Distance Is Long.........................................................................1181 Symptom 4: The ABS Function Does Not Operate....................................................................1181 Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Sound Occurs........................................................1182 Symptom 6: Vehicle Jerks During VDC/TCS/ABS Control.............................................................1182 WHEEL SENSORS.......................................................................................................1184 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1184 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1184 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1184 SENSOR ROTOR........................................................................................................1186 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1186 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1186 Front...................................................................................................1186 Rear....................................................................................................1186 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1186 Front...................................................................................................1186 Rear....................................................................................................1186 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)...............................................................................1187 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1187 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1187 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1187 G SENSOR............................................................................................................1189 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1189 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1189 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1189 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR...............................................................................................1190 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1190 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1190 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1190 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)............................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 83 co..............................................................................................................................1192 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1192 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1194 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1194 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1194 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................1194 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................1194 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................1194 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1196 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1196 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1197 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1198 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1198 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1200 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1200 System Drawing..................................................................................................1201 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1202 Inspection......................................................................................................1202 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1202 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS...........................................................................1202 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1202 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1202 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1203 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1204 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1205 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1205 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1205 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1206 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1206 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1206 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1207 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1208 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1208 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1208 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1208 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1209 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1211 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1212 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1212 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1212 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1212 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1212 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1212 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1212 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1213 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1213 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1213 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1215 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1215 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1216 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY.................................................................................1217 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1217 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1217 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1218 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1218 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1218 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING.......................................................................................1219 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1219 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1219 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1219 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1219 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1220 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1220 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1220 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1220 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1220 VK45DE..................................................................................................................1221 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1221 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1221 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1222 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1222 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1222 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1223 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1223 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1225 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1225 System Drawing..................................................................................................1226 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1227 Inspection......................................................................................................1227 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1227 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1227 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1227 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1227 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1228 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1229 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1230 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1230 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1230 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1232 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1232 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1232 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1232 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1234 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1234 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1234 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1234 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1235 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1237 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1238 Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type)...............................................................1238 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1238 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1238 Fan Coupling............................................................................................1238 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1238 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1238 Removal and Installation (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1239 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1239 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1239 Disassembly and Assembly (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1239 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1239 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1239 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1239 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1239 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1240 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1240 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1240 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1240 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1241 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1241 THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................1242 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1242 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1242 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1243 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1243 Thermostat and Water Control Valve......................................................................1243 Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe.......................................................................1244 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1244 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1245 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1245 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1245 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1245 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1245 WATER CONTROL VALVE.........................................................................................1245 di..............................................................................................................................1246 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1246 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................1248 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1248 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1248 COMBINATION METERS......................................................................................................1249 System Description..................................................................................................1249 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................1249 Illumination Control........................................................................................1249 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.......................................................................................1249 HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER....................................................................1250 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1250 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE.........................................................................................1251 TACHOMETER......................................................................................................1251 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1251 SPEEDOMETER.....................................................................................................1251 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1251 Combination Meter...................................................................................................1252 CHECK...........................................................................................................1252 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................1253 Wiring Diagram — METER —............................................................................................1254 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1256 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1257 Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter............................................................................1257 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.........................................................................................1257 HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE.................................................................................1257 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1258 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1258 Diagnosis Flow......................................................................................................1258 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1260 Symptom Chart 1.....................................................................................................1261 Symptom Chart 2.....................................................................................................1261 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection.....................................................................................1262 Engine Speed Signal Inspection......................................................................................1263 Water Temperature Signal Inspection.................................................................................1264 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 1...............................................................................1265 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1265 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection 2...............................................................................1266 LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP...........................................................................................1266 CAN Communication System Inspection.................................................................................1267 Communication Line Inspection.......................................................................................1267 Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch Inspection...........................................................1269 Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies......................................................1269 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL position...........................................................................1270 Electrical Components Inspection....................................................................................1270 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT....................................................................................1270 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump (Main)...........................................................1270 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Pump (Main) Harness........................................................1270 Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit (Sub)..........................................................................1271 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1271 COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY......................................................................................1271 Disassembly and Assembly for Combination Meter......................................................................1271 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1271 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1272 Removal and Installation of Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch..........................................1272 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1272 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1272 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP...............................................................................................1273 System Description..................................................................................................1273 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS............................................................................................1273 Between Unified Meter & A/C amp. and Combination Meter......................................................1273 FAIL-SAFE.......................................................................................................1274 Solution When Communication Error Between the Unified Meter & A/C Amp. and the Combination Meter............1274 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1274 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1274 Schematic...........................................................................................................1275 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1276 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1276 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1277 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1277 Display Item List...........................................................................................1277 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1277 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1277 Display Item List...........................................................................................1278 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................1279 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1279 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1279 COMPASS.................................................................................................................1280 System Description..................................................................................................1280 DIRECTION DISPLAY...............................................................................................1280 “C” is Displayed in the Compass Window......................................................................1281 Inaccurate Compass Direction................................................................................1281 Wiring Diagram – COMPAS –...........................................................................................1282 Removal and Installation of Compass.................................................................................1283 WARNING LAMPS...........................................................................................................1284 Schematic...........................................................................................................1284 Wiring Diagram — WARN —.............................................................................................1285 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)............................................................1293 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)................................................1294 Component Inspection................................................................................................1295 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.............................................................................................1295 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................................................................1296 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —...........................................................................................1296 A/T Indicator Is Malfunction........................................................................................1298 WARNING CHIME...........................................................................................................1300 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1300 System Description..................................................................................................1300 FUNCTION........................................................................................................1300 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY)............................................................1301 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITH INTELLIGENT KEY)...............................................................1301 When Mechanical Key Is Used.................................................................................1301 When Intelligent Key Is Carried With The Driver.............................................................1301 LIGHT WARNING CHIME.............................................................................................1302 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................1302 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................1302 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1302 Schematic...........................................................................................................1303 Wiring Diagram — CHIME —............................................................................................1304 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1307 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1308 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1309 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................1309 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1310 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................1310 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1311 DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION....................................................................................1311 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................1311 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1312 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1312 Data Monitor Item...........................................................................................1312 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1312 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1312 Active Test Item............................................................................................1312 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................1312 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1312 Display Item List...........................................................................................1313 All Warnings Are Not Operated.......................................................................................1313 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)...................1314 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Without Intelligent Key)........................................................1315 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Mechanical Key Is Used)..............................1317 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (With Intelligent Key, When Intelligent Key Is Carried With Th...................1319 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate................................................................................1321 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate............................................................................1322 CLOCK...................................................................................................................1324 Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —............................................................................................1324 Removal and Installation of Clock...................................................................................1325 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1325 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1325 REAR VIEW MONITOR.......................................................................................................1326 System Description..................................................................................................1326 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................1326 AV COMMUNICATION LINE...........................................................................................1326 REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION......................................................................................1326 Side Distance Guideline.....................................................................................1326 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1327 Schematic...........................................................................................................1328 Wiring Diagram — R/VIEW —...........................................................................................1329 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit.....................................................1332 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................1332 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1332 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1333 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1333 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1334 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1334 Display Item List...........................................................................................1334 Side Distance Guideline Correction..................................................................................1334 SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................1334 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1336 Rear View Is Not Displayed With The A/T Selector Lever In R-position................................................1337 The Rear View Image Is Distorted....................................................................................1341 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera Control Unit...........................................................1342 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1342 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1342 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera........................................................................1342 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1342 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1343 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 ec..............................................................................................................................1344 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1344 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1358 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................1358 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................1358 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................1362 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1366 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1366 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................1366 Precaution......................................................................................................1366 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...........................................................................1369 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1370 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1370 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1371 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................1372 System Diagram..................................................................................................1372 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................1373 System Chart....................................................................................................1374 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................1375 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1375 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1375 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................1375 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................1376 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................1376 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................1376 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................1377 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................1377 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................1377 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................1377 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................1377 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1377 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1377 Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................................................................1378 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1378 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1378 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................1378 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1378 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1378 CAN communication...............................................................................................1379 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1379 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1380 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................1380 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................1380 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1380 With GST................................................................................................1380 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................1380 Method A................................................................................................1380 Method B................................................................................................1380 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment........................................................1381 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1381 OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE.................................................................................1382 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1383 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................1392 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1392 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1392 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................1392 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1392 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1392 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................1392 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1392 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1392 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1393 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1393 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1393 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................1394 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................1394 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................1394 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1394 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1395 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................1395 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................1396 Introduction....................................................................................................1396 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................1396 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................1397 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................1397 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................1400 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................1401 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................1401 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................1402 SRT Item................................................................................................1403 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................1403 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................1404 How to Display SRT Code.................................................................................1405 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................1406 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................1407 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................1408 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................1410 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................1410 IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)...............................................................1411 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................1411 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1411 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................1412 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................1412 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................1413 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)............................................1413 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor).....................................1413 How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa......................................1413 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................1413 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................1414 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................1414 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................1414 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................1414 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR....................................................1414 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................1415 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................1415 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................1415 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........1416 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........1417 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1417 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................1417 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................1418 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................1419 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................1419 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1419 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1420 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................1420 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................1420 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................1421 Flow Chart..............................................................................................1421 Description for Work Flow...............................................................................1422 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................1422 Description.............................................................................................1422 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................1423 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................1423 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................1425 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1426 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................1431 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................1431 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................1432 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................1435 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................1441 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................1443 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................1443 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1443 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................1443 CONSULT-II Function.............................................................................................1452 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1452 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................1453 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1454 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................1455 Work Item...............................................................................................1455 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................1456 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................1456 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................1456 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................1457 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1457 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................1461 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1461 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................1461 Test Item...............................................................................................1461 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................1462 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................1462 SRT Work Support Mode...................................................................................1462 DTC Work Support Mode...................................................................................1463 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................1464 Description.............................................................................................1464 Operation...............................................................................................1465 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................1465 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1465 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1466 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1466 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................1468 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................1472 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................1472 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.................................1472 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................1474 Description.....................................................................................................1474 Testing Condition...............................................................................................1474 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................1474 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1475 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................1478 Description.....................................................................................................1478 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1478 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................1479 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1479 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1480 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................1484 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................1485 Description.....................................................................................................1485 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1485 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1485 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1486 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1487 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................1488 Description.....................................................................................................1488 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1488 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1488 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1489 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1489 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1489 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1489 WITH GST....................................................................................................1490 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1491 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER.........................................................................1492 Description.....................................................................................................1492 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1492 OPERATION...................................................................................................1492 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1492 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1492 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1493 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1493 WITH GST....................................................................................................1493 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1494 BANK 1......................................................................................................1494 BANK 2......................................................................................................1496 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1497 Component Inspection............................................................................................1499 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER...............................................................................1499 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1499 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1499 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................1500 Description.....................................................................................................1500 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1500 OPERATION...................................................................................................1500 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1500 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1500 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1501 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1501 WITH GST....................................................................................................1501 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1502 BANK 1......................................................................................................1502 BANK 2......................................................................................................1504 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1505 Component Inspection............................................................................................1507 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................1507 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1507 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1507 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................1508 Component Description...........................................................................................1508 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1508 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1508 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1509 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1509 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1509 With GST................................................................................................1509 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1509 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1509 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1510 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1510 With GST................................................................................................1510 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1511 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1512 Component Inspection............................................................................................1515 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1515 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1515 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1515 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................1516 Component Description...........................................................................................1516 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1516 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1516 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1516 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1517 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................1517 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1517 With GST................................................................................................1517 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................1517 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1517 With GST................................................................................................1517 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1518 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1519 Component Inspection............................................................................................1522 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1522 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1522 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1522 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................1523 Component Description...........................................................................................1523 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1523 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1523 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1523 WITH GST....................................................................................................1524 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1525 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1526 Component Inspection............................................................................................1527 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1527 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1527 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1527 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................1528 Component Description...........................................................................................1528 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1528 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1528 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1529 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1529 WITH GST....................................................................................................1529 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1530 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1531 Component Inspection............................................................................................1532 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1532 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1532 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1532 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1533 Component Description...........................................................................................1533 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1533 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1533 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1533 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1534 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1534 WITH GST....................................................................................................1534 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1535 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1536 Component Inspection............................................................................................1539 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1539 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1539 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1539 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................1540 Component Description...........................................................................................1540 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1540 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1541 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1541 WITH GST....................................................................................................1541 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1541 Component Inspection............................................................................................1542 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1542 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1542 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1542 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................1543 Component Description...........................................................................................1543 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1543 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1543 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1543 WITH GST....................................................................................................1544 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1544 Component Inspection............................................................................................1545 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1545 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1545 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1545 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................1546 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1546 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1546 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1546 WITH GST....................................................................................................1546 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1546 Component Inspection............................................................................................1547 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1547 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1547 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1547 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1..............................................................................................1548 Component Description...........................................................................................1548 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1548 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1548 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1549 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1549 WITH GST....................................................................................................1549 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1550 BANK 1......................................................................................................1550 BANK 2......................................................................................................1552 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1553 Component Inspection............................................................................................1555 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1555 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1555 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1556 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1556 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1556 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1..............................................................................................1557 Component Description...........................................................................................1557 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1557 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1557 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1558 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1558 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1559 WITH GST....................................................................................................1559 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1560 BANK 1......................................................................................................1560 BANK 2......................................................................................................1562 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1563 Component Inspection............................................................................................1567 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1567 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1567 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1568 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1568 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1568 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1..............................................................................................1569 Component Description...........................................................................................1569 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1569 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1569 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1570 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1570 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1571 WITH GST....................................................................................................1571 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1572 BANK 1......................................................................................................1572 BANK 2......................................................................................................1574 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1575 Component Inspection............................................................................................1577 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1577 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1577 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1578 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1578 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1578 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................1579 Component Description...........................................................................................1579 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1579 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1579 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1580 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1580 WITH GST....................................................................................................1580 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1581 BANK 1......................................................................................................1581 BANK 2......................................................................................................1583 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1584 Component Inspection............................................................................................1586 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1586 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1586 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1586 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1587 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1587 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................1588 Component Description...........................................................................................1588 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1588 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1588 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1589 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1589 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1589 WITH GST....................................................................................................1589 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1591 BANK 1......................................................................................................1591 BANK 2......................................................................................................1593 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1594 Component Inspection............................................................................................1596 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1596 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1596 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1597 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1598 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1598 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1599 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1599 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1599 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1599 WITH GST....................................................................................................1600 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1601 BANK 1......................................................................................................1601 BANK 2......................................................................................................1602 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1603 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1608 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1608 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1608 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1608 WITH GST....................................................................................................1609 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1610 BANK 1......................................................................................................1610 BANK 2......................................................................................................1611 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1612 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................1616 Component Description...........................................................................................1616 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1616 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1616 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1616 WITH GST....................................................................................................1617 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1618 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1619 Component Inspection............................................................................................1620 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1620 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1621 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1621 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................1622 Component Description...........................................................................................1622 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1622 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1622 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1622 WITH GST....................................................................................................1622 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1623 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1624 Component Inspection............................................................................................1625 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1625 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1626 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1626 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1627 Component Description...........................................................................................1627 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1627 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1627 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1627 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1628 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1628 WITH GST....................................................................................................1628 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1629 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1630 Component Inspection............................................................................................1633 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1633 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1633 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1633 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................1634 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1634 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1634 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1635 WITH GST....................................................................................................1635 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1635 DTC P0327, P0328 KS.................................................................................................1640 Component Description...........................................................................................1640 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1640 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1640 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1640 WITH GST....................................................................................................1640 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1641 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1642 Component Inspection............................................................................................1643 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1643 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1644 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1644 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................1645 Component Description...........................................................................................1645 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1645 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1645 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1645 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1645 WITH GST....................................................................................................1645 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1646 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1647 Component Inspection............................................................................................1650 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1650 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1650 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1650 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).................................................................................1651 Component Description...........................................................................................1651 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1651 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1651 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1651 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1651 WITH GST....................................................................................................1651 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1652 BANK 1......................................................................................................1652 BANK 2......................................................................................................1654 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1655 Component Inspection............................................................................................1658 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1658 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1658 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1658 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................1659 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1659 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1659 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1659 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1660 WITH GST....................................................................................................1660 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1661 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1664 System Description..............................................................................................1664 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1664 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1664 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1665 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1665 WITH GST....................................................................................................1665 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1666 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1669 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1669 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1670 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1670 WITH GST....................................................................................................1670 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1671 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................1678 Description.....................................................................................................1678 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1678 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1678 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1678 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1679 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1679 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1679 WITH GST....................................................................................................1679 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1680 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1682 Component Inspection............................................................................................1683 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1683 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1683 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1683 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1684 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1684 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1685 Component Description...........................................................................................1685 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1685 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1685 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1686 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1686 WITH GST....................................................................................................1686 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1687 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1688 Component Inspection............................................................................................1690 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1690 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1690 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1691 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1692 Component Description...........................................................................................1692 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1692 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1692 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1693 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1693 WITH GST....................................................................................................1693 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1693 Component Inspection............................................................................................1694 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1694 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1695 Component Description...........................................................................................1695 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1695 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1695 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1696 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1696 WITH GST....................................................................................................1696 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1697 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1698 Component Inspection............................................................................................1700 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1700 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1701 Component Description...........................................................................................1701 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1701 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1701 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1702 With CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1702 With GST....................................................................................................1702 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1703 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1704 Component Inspection............................................................................................1708 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1708 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1709 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1709 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1710 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1710 WITH GST....................................................................................................1711 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1711 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1717 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1717 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1718 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1719 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1719 WITH GST....................................................................................................1719 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1720 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1727 Component Description...........................................................................................1727 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1727 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1727 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1727 WITH GST....................................................................................................1727 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1728 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1728 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1728 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1729 Component Description...........................................................................................1729 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1729 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1729 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1729 WITH GST....................................................................................................1730 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1730 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1730 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1730 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................1731 Component Description...........................................................................................1731 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1731 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1731 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1731 WITH GST....................................................................................................1731 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1732 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1732 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1732 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................1733 Description.....................................................................................................1733 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1733 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1733 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1733 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1733 WITH GST....................................................................................................1734 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1734 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1735 Description.....................................................................................................1735 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1735 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1735 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1735 WITH GST....................................................................................................1735 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1736 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1737 Description.....................................................................................................1737 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1737 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1737 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1737 WITH GST....................................................................................................1737 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1738 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................1739 Component Description...........................................................................................1739 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1739 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1739 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1739 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1739 WITH GST....................................................................................................1739 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1740 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1741 Component Inspection............................................................................................1743 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1743 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1743 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1743 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................1744 Component Description...........................................................................................1744 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1744 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1744 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1744 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1744 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1744 With GST................................................................................................1744 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1745 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1745 With GST................................................................................................1745 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1745 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1745 With GST................................................................................................1745 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1745 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................1747 Component Description...........................................................................................1747 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1747 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1747 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1747 WITH GST....................................................................................................1747 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1748 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1749 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................1751 Component Description...........................................................................................1751 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1751 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1751 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1751 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1751 WITH GST....................................................................................................1751 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1752 BANK 1......................................................................................................1752 BANK 2......................................................................................................1754 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1755 Component Inspection............................................................................................1757 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1757 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1757 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1757 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................1758 Component Description...........................................................................................1758 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1758 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1758 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1758 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................1758 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1758 With GST................................................................................................1758 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1759 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1759 With GST................................................................................................1759 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1759 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................1760 Description.....................................................................................................1760 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1760 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1760 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1760 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1760 WITH GST....................................................................................................1760 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1761 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1762 Component Inspection............................................................................................1765 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1765 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1765 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1765 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................1766 Component Description...........................................................................................1766 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1766 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1766 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1766 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1766 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................1766 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1766 With GST................................................................................................1767 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................1767 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1767 With GST................................................................................................1767 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1768 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1769 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................1771 Component Description...........................................................................................1771 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1771 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1771 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1771 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1771 WITH GST....................................................................................................1771 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1772 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1773 Component Inspection............................................................................................1774 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1774 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1775 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1775 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1..............................................................................................1776 Component Description...........................................................................................1776 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1776 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1776 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1777 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1777 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1778 WITH GST....................................................................................................1778 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1778 Component Inspection............................................................................................1780 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1780 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1780 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1780 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1781 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1781 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1..............................................................................................1782 Component Description...........................................................................................1782 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1782 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1782 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1783 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1783 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1784 WITH GST....................................................................................................1784 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1784 Component Inspection............................................................................................1786 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1786 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1786 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1787 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1788 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................1788 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................1789 Component Description...........................................................................................1789 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1789 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1789 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1790 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1790 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1790 WITH GST....................................................................................................1790 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1792 BANK 1......................................................................................................1792 BANK 2......................................................................................................1794 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1795 Component Inspection............................................................................................1797 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1797 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1797 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1798 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1799 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1799 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................1800 Component Description...........................................................................................1800 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1800 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1800 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1801 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1801 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1801 WITH GST....................................................................................................1801 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1803 BANK 1......................................................................................................1803 BANK 2......................................................................................................1805 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1806 Component Inspection............................................................................................1808 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1808 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1808 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1809 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1810 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1810 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................1811 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1811 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1811 WITH CONSULT-Ⅱ..............................................................................................1811 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1811 WITH GST....................................................................................................1812 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1812 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................1813 Description.....................................................................................................1813 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1813 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1813 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1813 WITH GST....................................................................................................1813 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1813 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................1814 Description.....................................................................................................1814 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1814 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1814 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1814 WITH GST....................................................................................................1814 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1814 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................1815 Description.....................................................................................................1815 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1815 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................1815 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................1816 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................1817 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1817 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................1817 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1818 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1818 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1818 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1819 WITH GST....................................................................................................1819 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1820 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1822 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................1822 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................1824 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................1827 Component Inspection............................................................................................1827 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2.................................................................................1827 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1828 Component Description...........................................................................................1828 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1828 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1828 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1828 WITH GST....................................................................................................1828 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1829 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1829 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1829 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1830 Component Description...........................................................................................1830 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1830 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1830 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1830 WITH GST....................................................................................................1830 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1831 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1831 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1831 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................1832 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1832 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1832 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1832 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1832 WITH GST....................................................................................................1832 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1833 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1834 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................1837 Description.....................................................................................................1837 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1837 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1837 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1837 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1838 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1838 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1838 WITH GST....................................................................................................1838 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1839 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1841 Component Inspection............................................................................................1844 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1844 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1844 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1844 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1844 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1844 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1845 Component Description...........................................................................................1845 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1845 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1845 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1846 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1846 WITH GST....................................................................................................1846 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1847 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1848 Component Inspection............................................................................................1849 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1849 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1849 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1850 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................1851 Component Description...........................................................................................1851 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1851 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1851 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1851 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1852 WITH GST....................................................................................................1852 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1853 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1854 Component Inspection............................................................................................1857 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................1857 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................1858 Component Description...........................................................................................1858 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1858 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1858 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1859 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1859 WITH GST....................................................................................................1859 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1860 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1861 Component Inspection............................................................................................1863 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1863 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................1864 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1864 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1864 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1864 WITH GST....................................................................................................1864 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1864 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................1865 Component Description...........................................................................................1865 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1865 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1865 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1866 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1866 WITH GST....................................................................................................1866 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1867 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1868 Component Inspection............................................................................................1873 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................1873 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1873 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................1873 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................1875 Component Description...........................................................................................1875 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1875 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1875 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1876 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1876 WITH GST....................................................................................................1876 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1877 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1878 Component Inspection............................................................................................1883 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1883 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1883 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................1884 Component Description...........................................................................................1884 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1884 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1884 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1884 WITH GST....................................................................................................1884 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1885 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................1886 Component Description...........................................................................................1886 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1886 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1886 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1886 WITH GST....................................................................................................1886 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1887 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................1888 Component Description...........................................................................................1888 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1888 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1888 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1888 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1888 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1889 WITH GST....................................................................................................1889 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1890 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1891 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................1893 Description.....................................................................................................1893 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1893 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1893 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1893 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1893 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1893 WITH GST....................................................................................................1893 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1894 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1895 Component Inspection............................................................................................1897 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1897 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1898 Component Description...........................................................................................1898 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1898 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1898 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1898 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1899 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1899 WITH GST....................................................................................................1899 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1900 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1901 Component Inspection............................................................................................1903 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1903 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1904 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1904 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1905 Component Description...........................................................................................1905 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1905 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1905 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1905 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1906 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1906 WITH GST....................................................................................................1906 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1907 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1908 Component Inspection............................................................................................1911 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1911 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1911 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1911 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1912 Component Description...........................................................................................1912 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1912 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1912 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1912 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1913 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1913 WITH GST....................................................................................................1913 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1914 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1915 Component Inspection............................................................................................1918 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1918 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1918 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1918 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................1919 Component Description...........................................................................................1919 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1919 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1919 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1919 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1920 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1920 WITH GST....................................................................................................1920 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1921 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1922 Component Inspection............................................................................................1927 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1927 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1927 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1927 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................1928 Component Description...........................................................................................1928 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................1928 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1929 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1934 Component Inspection............................................................................................1938 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................1938 CONDENSER...................................................................................................1939 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1939 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................1939 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................1940 Component Description...........................................................................................1940 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1940 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1941 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1942 Component Inspection............................................................................................1945 INJECTOR....................................................................................................1945 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1945 INJECTOR....................................................................................................1945 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................1946 Description.....................................................................................................1946 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1946 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1946 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1946 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1947 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1948 Component Inspection............................................................................................1951 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................1951 CONDENSER...................................................................................................1951 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1951 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................1951 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................1952 Component Description...........................................................................................1952 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1953 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1954 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1956 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................1956 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................1957 Description.....................................................................................................1957 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1957 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1957 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................1958 Component Description...........................................................................................1958 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1958 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1959 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1960 Component Inspection............................................................................................1965 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................1965 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1965 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................1965 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................1967 Component Description...........................................................................................1967 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1967 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1968 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1969 Component Inspection............................................................................................1974 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1974 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1974 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................1975 Component Description...........................................................................................1975 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1975 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1976 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1977 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................1978 Description.....................................................................................................1978 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................1978 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1979 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1980 Component Inspection............................................................................................1983 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................1983 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................1984 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1984 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................1986 Description.....................................................................................................1986 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1986 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................1987 Component Inspection............................................................................................1989 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1989 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................1989 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1989 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1989 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1989 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1989 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................1990 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1990 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1990 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1990 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................1990 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1991 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................1991 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................1993 System Description..............................................................................................1993 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1994 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................1994 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................1995 Component Inspection............................................................................................1996 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................1996 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1996 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1997 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................1998 Description.....................................................................................................1998 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1998 Component Inspection............................................................................................1998 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................1998 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................1999 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2000 System Description..............................................................................................2000 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2000 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2000 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2000 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................2000 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2000 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2000 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2001 Component Description...........................................................................................2002 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2002 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2002 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2002 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2002 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2002 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2003 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2003 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2003 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2003 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2003 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2003 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2003 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater...................................................................................2003 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2003 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2003 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2003 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2003 Injector........................................................................................................2004 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2004 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2005 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................2005 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................2005 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................2008 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2013 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................2013 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................2013 Precaution......................................................................................................2013 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...........................................................................2016 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2017 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2017 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2018 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................2019 System Diagram..................................................................................................2019 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................2020 System Chart....................................................................................................2021 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................2022 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2022 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2022 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................2022 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................2023 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................2023 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................2023 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................2024 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................2024 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................2024 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................2024 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................2024 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2024 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2024 Nissan Torque Demand (NTD) Control System.......................................................................2025 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2025 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2025 Air Conditioning Cut Control....................................................................................2026 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2026 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2026 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................2026 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2026 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2026 CAN communication...............................................................................................2027 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2027 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................2028 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................2028 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................2028 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2028 With GST................................................................................................2028 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................2028 Method A................................................................................................2028 Method B................................................................................................2028 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment........................................................2030 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2030 OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE.................................................................................2031 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2032 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................2041 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2041 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2041 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................2041 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2041 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2041 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................2041 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2041 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2041 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2042 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2042 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2042 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................2043 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................2043 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................2043 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2043 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2044 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................2044 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................2046 Introduction....................................................................................................2046 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................2046 Emission-related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................2047 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................2047 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................2050 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................2051 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................2051 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................2052 SRT Item................................................................................................2052 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................2053 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................2054 How to Display SRT Code.................................................................................2055 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................2055 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................2056 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................2057 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................2058 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................2058 IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)...............................................................2060 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................2060 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2060 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................2061 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................2061 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................2062 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................2062 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor).....................................2062 How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa......................................2062 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2062 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................2063 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................2063 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................2063 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2063 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR....................................................2063 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................2064 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................2064 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................2064 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........2065 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........2066 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2066 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................2066 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................2067 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................2068 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................2068 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2068 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................2069 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................2069 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................2069 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................2070 Flow Chart..............................................................................................2070 Description for Work Flow...............................................................................2071 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................2071 Description.............................................................................................2071 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................2072 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................2072 Fail-safe Chart.................................................................................................2074 Basic Inspection................................................................................................2076 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................2081 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................2081 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................2083 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................2085 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................2091 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................2093 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................2093 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2093 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................2093 CONSULT-II Function.............................................................................................2102 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2102 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................2104 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2105 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................2106 Work Item...............................................................................................2106 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................2107 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................2107 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................2107 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................2108 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2108 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................2112 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2112 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................2112 Test Item...............................................................................................2112 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................2113 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................2113 SRT Work Support Mode...................................................................................2113 DTC Work Support Mode...................................................................................2113 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................2114 Description.............................................................................................2114 Operation...............................................................................................2115 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................2115 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2115 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2116 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2116 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................2118 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................2121 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................2121 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.................................2121 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................2123 Description.....................................................................................................2123 Testing Condition...............................................................................................2123 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................2123 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2124 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................2127 Description.....................................................................................................2127 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2127 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................2128 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2128 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2129 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................2134 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................2135 Description.....................................................................................................2135 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2135 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2135 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2136 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2137 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................2138 Description.....................................................................................................2138 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2138 COMPONENT INSPECTION........................................................................................2138 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve..............................................................2138 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor.............................................................2139 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2139 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2139 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2139 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2140 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2140 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2140 With GST................................................................................................2140 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2140 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2140 With GST................................................................................................2140 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2141 BANK 1......................................................................................................2141 BANK 2......................................................................................................2143 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2144 Component Inspection............................................................................................2148 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2148 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2148 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2148 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2148 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2148 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER.........................................................................2149 Description.....................................................................................................2149 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2149 OPERATION...................................................................................................2149 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2149 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2149 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2150 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2150 WITH GST....................................................................................................2150 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2151 BANK 1......................................................................................................2151 BANK 2......................................................................................................2153 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2154 Component Inspection............................................................................................2156 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER...............................................................................2156 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2156 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2156 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................2157 Description.....................................................................................................2157 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2157 OPERATION...................................................................................................2157 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2157 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2157 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2158 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2158 WITH GST....................................................................................................2158 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2159 BANK 1......................................................................................................2159 BANK 2......................................................................................................2161 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2162 Component Inspection............................................................................................2164 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................2164 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2164 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2164 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2165 Component Description...........................................................................................2165 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2165 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2165 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2166 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2166 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2166 With GST................................................................................................2166 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2166 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2166 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2167 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2167 With GST................................................................................................2167 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2168 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2169 Component Inspection............................................................................................2172 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2172 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2172 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2172 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................2173 Component Description...........................................................................................2173 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2173 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2173 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2173 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2174 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................2174 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2174 With GST................................................................................................2174 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................2174 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2174 With GST................................................................................................2174 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2175 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2176 Component Inspection............................................................................................2179 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2179 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2179 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2179 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................2180 Component Description...........................................................................................2180 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2180 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2180 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2180 WITH GST....................................................................................................2181 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2182 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2183 Component Inspection............................................................................................2184 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2184 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2184 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2184 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................2185 Component Description...........................................................................................2185 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2185 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2185 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2186 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2186 WITH GST....................................................................................................2186 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2187 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2188 Component Inspection............................................................................................2189 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2189 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2190 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2190 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2191 Component Description...........................................................................................2191 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2191 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2191 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2191 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2192 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2192 WITH GST....................................................................................................2192 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2193 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2194 Component Inspection............................................................................................2197 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2197 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2197 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2197 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................2198 Component Description...........................................................................................2198 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2198 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2199 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2199 WITH GST....................................................................................................2199 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2199 Component Inspection............................................................................................2200 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2200 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2200 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2200 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................2201 Component Description...........................................................................................2201 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2201 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2201 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2201 WITH GST....................................................................................................2202 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2202 Component Inspection............................................................................................2203 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2203 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2203 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2203 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................2204 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2204 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2204 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2204 WITH GST....................................................................................................2204 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2204 Component Inspection............................................................................................2205 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2205 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2205 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2205 DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1..............................................................................................2206 Component Description...........................................................................................2206 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2206 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2206 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2207 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2207 WITH GST....................................................................................................2207 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2208 BANK 1......................................................................................................2208 BANK 2......................................................................................................2210 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2211 Component Inspection............................................................................................2213 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2213 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2213 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2214 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2214 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2214 DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1..............................................................................................2215 Component Description...........................................................................................2215 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2215 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2215 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2216 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2216 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2217 WITH GST....................................................................................................2217 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2218 BANK 1......................................................................................................2218 BANK 2......................................................................................................2220 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2221 Component Inspection............................................................................................2225 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2225 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2225 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2226 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2226 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2226 DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1..............................................................................................2227 Component Description...........................................................................................2227 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2227 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2227 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2228 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2228 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2229 WITH GST....................................................................................................2229 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2230 BANK 1......................................................................................................2230 BANK 2......................................................................................................2232 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2233 Component Inspection............................................................................................2235 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2235 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2235 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2235 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2236 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2236 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................2237 Component Description...........................................................................................2237 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2237 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2237 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2238 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2238 WITH GST....................................................................................................2238 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2239 BANK 1......................................................................................................2239 BANK 2......................................................................................................2241 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2242 Component Inspection............................................................................................2244 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2244 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2244 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2245 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2245 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2245 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................2246 Component Description...........................................................................................2246 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2246 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2246 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2247 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2247 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2247 WITH GST....................................................................................................2247 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2249 BANK 1......................................................................................................2249 BANK 2......................................................................................................2251 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2252 Component Inspection............................................................................................2255 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2255 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2255 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2256 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2256 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2256 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2257 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2257 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2257 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2257 WITH GST....................................................................................................2258 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2259 BANK 1......................................................................................................2259 BANK 2......................................................................................................2260 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2261 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2266 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2266 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2266 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2266 WITH GST....................................................................................................2267 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2268 BANK 1......................................................................................................2268 BANK 2......................................................................................................2269 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2270 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................2274 Component Description...........................................................................................2274 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2274 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2274 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2274 WITH GST....................................................................................................2275 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2276 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2277 Component Inspection............................................................................................2279 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2279 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2279 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2279 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................2280 Component Description...........................................................................................2280 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2280 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2280 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2280 WITH GST....................................................................................................2280 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2281 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2282 Component Inspection............................................................................................2284 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2284 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2284 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2284 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2285 Component Description...........................................................................................2285 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2285 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2285 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2285 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2286 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2286 WITH GST....................................................................................................2286 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2287 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2288 Component Inspection............................................................................................2291 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2291 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2291 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2291 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................2292 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2292 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2292 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2293 WITH GST....................................................................................................2293 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2293 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS...................................................................................2298 Component Description...........................................................................................2298 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2298 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2298 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2298 WITH GST....................................................................................................2298 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2299 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2300 Component Inspection............................................................................................2302 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2302 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2302 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2302 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................2303 Component Description...........................................................................................2303 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2303 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2303 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2303 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2303 WITH GST....................................................................................................2303 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2304 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2305 Component Inspection............................................................................................2307 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2307 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2308 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2308 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)....................................................................2309 Component Description...........................................................................................2309 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2309 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2309 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2309 WITH GST....................................................................................................2309 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2310 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2311 Component Inspection............................................................................................2313 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2313 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2313 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2313 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................2314 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2314 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2314 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2314 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2315 WITH GST....................................................................................................2315 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2316 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2319 System Description..............................................................................................2319 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2319 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2319 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2320 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2320 WITH GST....................................................................................................2320 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2321 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2324 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2324 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2325 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2325 WITH GST....................................................................................................2325 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2326 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................2333 Description.....................................................................................................2333 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2333 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2333 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2333 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2334 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2334 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2334 WITH GST....................................................................................................2334 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2335 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2337 Component Inspection............................................................................................2338 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2338 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2338 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2338 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2339 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2339 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2340 Component Description...........................................................................................2340 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2340 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2340 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2341 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2341 WITH GST....................................................................................................2341 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2342 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2343 Component Inspection............................................................................................2345 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2345 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2345 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2346 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2347 Component Description...........................................................................................2347 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2347 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2347 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2348 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2348 WITH GST....................................................................................................2348 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2348 Component Inspection............................................................................................2349 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2349 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2350 Component Description...........................................................................................2350 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2350 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2350 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2351 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2351 WITH GST....................................................................................................2351 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2352 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2353 Component Inspection............................................................................................2356 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2356 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2357 Component Description...........................................................................................2357 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2357 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2357 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2358 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2358 WITH GST....................................................................................................2358 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2359 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2360 Component Inspection............................................................................................2364 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2364 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2365 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2365 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2366 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2366 WITH GST....................................................................................................2367 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2367 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2373 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2373 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2374 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2375 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2375 WITH GST....................................................................................................2375 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2376 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2383 Component Description...........................................................................................2383 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2383 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2383 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2383 WITH GST....................................................................................................2383 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2384 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2384 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2384 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2385 Component Description...........................................................................................2385 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2385 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2385 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2385 WITH GST....................................................................................................2386 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2386 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2386 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2386 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT..........................................................................2387 Component Description...........................................................................................2387 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2387 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2387 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2387 WITH GST....................................................................................................2387 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2388 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2388 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2388 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................2389 Description.....................................................................................................2389 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2389 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2389 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2389 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2390 WITH GST....................................................................................................2390 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2390 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2391 Description.....................................................................................................2391 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2391 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2391 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2391 WITH GST....................................................................................................2391 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2392 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2393 Description.....................................................................................................2393 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2393 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2393 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2393 WITH GST....................................................................................................2393 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2394 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................2395 Component Description...........................................................................................2395 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2395 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2395 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2395 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2395 WITH GST....................................................................................................2395 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2396 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2397 Component Inspection............................................................................................2399 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2399 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2399 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2399 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................2400 Component Description...........................................................................................2400 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2400 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2400 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2400 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2400 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2400 With GST................................................................................................2400 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2401 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2401 With GST................................................................................................2401 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2401 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2401 With GST................................................................................................2401 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2401 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................2403 Component Description...........................................................................................2403 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2403 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2403 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2403 WITH GST....................................................................................................2403 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2404 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2405 DTC P1102 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2407 Component Description...........................................................................................2407 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2407 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2407 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2407 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2408 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2408 WITH GST....................................................................................................2408 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2409 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2410 Component Inspection............................................................................................2412 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2412 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2412 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2412 DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................2413 Component Description...........................................................................................2413 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2413 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2413 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2413 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2413 WITH GST....................................................................................................2413 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2414 BANK 1......................................................................................................2414 BANK 2......................................................................................................2416 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2417 Component Inspection............................................................................................2419 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2419 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2419 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2419 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................2420 Component Description...........................................................................................2420 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2420 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2420 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2420 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................2420 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2420 With GST................................................................................................2420 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2421 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2421 With GST................................................................................................2421 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2421 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................2422 Description.....................................................................................................2422 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2422 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2422 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2422 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2422 WITH GST....................................................................................................2422 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2423 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2424 Component Inspection............................................................................................2427 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2427 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2427 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2427 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................2428 Component Description...........................................................................................2428 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2428 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2428 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2428 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2428 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124.....................................................................................2428 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2428 With GST................................................................................................2429 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126.....................................................................................2429 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2429 With GST................................................................................................2429 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2430 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2431 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................2433 Component Description...........................................................................................2433 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2433 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2433 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2433 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2433 WITH GST....................................................................................................2433 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2434 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2435 Component Inspection............................................................................................2436 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2436 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2437 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2437 DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR........................................................................2438 Component Description...........................................................................................2438 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2438 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2438 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2438 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2438 WITH GST....................................................................................................2438 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2439 BANK 1......................................................................................................2439 BANK 2......................................................................................................2441 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2442 Component Inspection............................................................................................2445 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2445 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2445 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2445 DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1..............................................................................................2446 Component Description...........................................................................................2446 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2446 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2446 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2447 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2447 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2448 WITH GST....................................................................................................2448 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2448 Component Inspection............................................................................................2450 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2450 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2450 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2451 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2451 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2451 DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1..............................................................................................2452 Component Description...........................................................................................2452 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2452 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2452 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2453 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2453 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2454 WITH GST....................................................................................................2454 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2454 Component Inspection............................................................................................2456 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2456 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2456 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2457 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2458 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1......................................................................................2458 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2..............................................................................................2459 Component Description...........................................................................................2459 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2459 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2459 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2460 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2460 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2460 WITH GST....................................................................................................2460 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2462 BANK 1......................................................................................................2462 BANK 2......................................................................................................2464 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2465 Component Inspection............................................................................................2468 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2468 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2468 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2469 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2469 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2469 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2..............................................................................................2470 Component Description...........................................................................................2470 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2470 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2470 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2471 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2471 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2471 WITH GST....................................................................................................2471 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2473 BANK 1......................................................................................................2473 BANK 2......................................................................................................2475 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2476 Component Inspection............................................................................................2479 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2479 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2479 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2480 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2480 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2480 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................2481 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2481 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2481 WITH CONSULT-Ⅱ..............................................................................................2481 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2482 WITH GST....................................................................................................2482 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2482 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................2483 Description.....................................................................................................2483 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2483 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2483 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2483 WITH GST....................................................................................................2483 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2483 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................2484 Description.....................................................................................................2484 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2484 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2484 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2484 WITH GST....................................................................................................2484 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2484 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................2485 Description.....................................................................................................2485 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2485 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................2485 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................2485 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................2485 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2486 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2486 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2486 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2486 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2487 WITH GST....................................................................................................2487 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2488 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2490 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................2492 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................2493 Component Inspection............................................................................................2494 COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................................................................2494 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2495 Component Description...........................................................................................2495 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2495 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2495 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2495 WITH GST....................................................................................................2495 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2496 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2496 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2496 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2497 Component Description...........................................................................................2497 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2497 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2497 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2497 WITH GST....................................................................................................2497 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2498 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2498 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2498 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................2499 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2499 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2499 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2499 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2499 WITH GST....................................................................................................2499 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2500 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2501 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................2503 Description.....................................................................................................2503 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2503 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2503 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2503 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2504 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2504 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2504 WITH GST....................................................................................................2504 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2505 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2507 Component Inspection............................................................................................2510 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2510 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2510 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2510 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2510 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2510 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2511 Component Description...........................................................................................2511 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2511 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2511 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2512 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2512 WITH GST....................................................................................................2512 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2513 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2514 Component Inspection............................................................................................2515 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2515 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2515 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2516 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2517 Component Description...........................................................................................2517 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2517 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2517 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2517 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2518 WITH GST....................................................................................................2518 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2519 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2520 Component Inspection............................................................................................2523 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2523 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2524 Component Description...........................................................................................2524 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2524 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2524 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2525 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2525 WITH GST....................................................................................................2525 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2526 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2527 Component Inspection............................................................................................2530 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2530 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2531 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2531 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2531 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2531 WITH GST....................................................................................................2531 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2531 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2532 Component Description...........................................................................................2532 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2532 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2532 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2533 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2533 WITH GST....................................................................................................2533 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2534 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2535 Component Inspection............................................................................................2540 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2540 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2540 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2540 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2542 Component Description...........................................................................................2542 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2542 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2542 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2543 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2543 WITH GST....................................................................................................2543 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2544 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2545 Component Inspection............................................................................................2549 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2549 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2549 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2550 Component Description...........................................................................................2550 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2550 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2550 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2550 WITH GST....................................................................................................2550 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2551 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2552 Component Description...........................................................................................2552 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2552 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2552 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2552 WITH GST....................................................................................................2552 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2553 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2554 Component Description...........................................................................................2554 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2554 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2554 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2554 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2554 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2555 WITH GST....................................................................................................2555 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2556 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2557 DTC P1720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (A/T OUTPUT).........................................................................2559 Description.....................................................................................................2559 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2559 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2559 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2559 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2559 WITH GST....................................................................................................2559 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2560 DTC P1780 SHIFT CHANGE SIGNAL.......................................................................................2561 Description.....................................................................................................2561 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2561 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2561 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2561 WITH GST....................................................................................................2561 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2561 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2563 Description.....................................................................................................2563 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2563 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2563 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2563 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2563 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2563 WITH GST....................................................................................................2563 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2564 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2565 Component Inspection............................................................................................2567 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2567 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2568 Component Description...........................................................................................2568 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2568 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2568 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2568 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2569 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2569 WITH GST....................................................................................................2569 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2570 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2571 Component Inspection............................................................................................2573 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2573 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2574 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2574 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2575 Component Description...........................................................................................2575 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2575 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2575 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2575 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2576 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2576 WITH GST....................................................................................................2576 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2577 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2578 Component Inspection............................................................................................2581 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2581 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2581 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2581 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2582 Component Description...........................................................................................2582 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2582 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2582 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2582 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2583 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2583 WITH GST....................................................................................................2583 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2584 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2585 Component Inspection............................................................................................2588 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2588 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2588 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2588 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2589 Component Description...........................................................................................2589 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2589 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2589 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2589 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2590 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2590 WITH GST....................................................................................................2590 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2591 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2592 Component Inspection............................................................................................2596 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2596 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2596 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2596 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)........................................................................2597 Description.....................................................................................................2597 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2597 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2598 Power Valve.............................................................................................2598 VIAS Control Solenoid Valve.............................................................................2598 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2598 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2599 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2600 Component Inspection............................................................................................2603 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2603 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2603 With GST................................................................................................2604 VACUUM TANK.................................................................................................2604 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2604 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2604 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2605 Component Description...........................................................................................2605 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2605 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2606 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2611 Component Inspection............................................................................................2615 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2615 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2615 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2616 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2616 INJECTOR CIRCUIT....................................................................................................2617 Component Description...........................................................................................2617 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2617 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2618 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2619 Component Inspection............................................................................................2622 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2622 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2622 INJECTOR....................................................................................................2622 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT...................................................................................................2623 Description.....................................................................................................2623 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2623 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2623 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2623 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2624 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2625 Component Inspection............................................................................................2628 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2628 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2629 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2629 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2629 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2630 Component Description...........................................................................................2630 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2631 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2632 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2634 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2634 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2635 Description.....................................................................................................2635 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2635 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2635 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2636 Component Description...........................................................................................2636 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2636 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2637 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2638 Component Inspection............................................................................................2644 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2644 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2644 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2644 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2645 Component Description...........................................................................................2645 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2645 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2646 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2647 Component Inspection............................................................................................2651 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2651 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2651 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2652 Component Description...........................................................................................2652 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2652 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2653 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2654 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2655 Description.....................................................................................................2655 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2655 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2656 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2657 Component Inspection............................................................................................2660 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2660 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2661 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2661 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2663 Description.....................................................................................................2663 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2663 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2664 Component Inspection............................................................................................2666 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2666 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)..................................................2666 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2666 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2666 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2666 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2666 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2667 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2667 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2667 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2667 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2667 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2668 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2668 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2670 System Description..............................................................................................2670 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2671 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2671 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2672 Component Inspection............................................................................................2673 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2673 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2673 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2674 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2675 Description.....................................................................................................2675 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2675 Component Inspection............................................................................................2675 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2675 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2676 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2677 System Description..............................................................................................2677 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2677 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2677 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2677 ACCEL OPERATION.............................................................................................2677 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2677 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2677 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2678 Component Description...........................................................................................2678 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2678 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2678 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2678 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2678 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2678 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2679 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2679 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2679 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2679 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2679 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2679 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2679 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater...................................................................................2679 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2679 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2679 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2679 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2679 Injector........................................................................................................2680 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2680 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 ei..............................................................................................................................2682 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2682 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................2684 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................2684 Precautions for Work................................................................................................2684 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................2685 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................2685 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................2685 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................2686 Work Flow...........................................................................................................2686 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................2686 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................2687 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................2687 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................2687 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................2687 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................2688 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................2688 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................2688 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................2688 DOORS...........................................................................................................2688 TRUNK...........................................................................................................2689 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................2689 SEATS...........................................................................................................2689 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................2689 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................2690 CLIP AND FASTENER.......................................................................................................2692 Clip and Fastener...................................................................................................2692 FRONT BUMPER............................................................................................................2695 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2695 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2697 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2697 FRONT FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY...................................................................................2698 Removal.....................................................................................................2698 Installation................................................................................................2698 REAR BUMPER.............................................................................................................2699 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2699 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2701 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2702 REAR BUMPER FASCIA..............................................................................................2702 Removal.....................................................................................................2702 Installation................................................................................................2702 REAR BUMPER CLOSING.............................................................................................2703 Removal.....................................................................................................2703 Installation................................................................................................2703 DRAFTER GUARD...................................................................................................2703 Removal.....................................................................................................2703 Installation................................................................................................2703 REAR FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY....................................................................................2703 Removal.....................................................................................................2703 Installation................................................................................................2703 FRONT GRILLE............................................................................................................2704 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2704 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2704 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2704 COWL TOP................................................................................................................2705 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2705 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2705 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2705 FENDER PROTECTOR........................................................................................................2706 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2706 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2706 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2706 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING....................................................................................................2707 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2707 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING......................................................................................2707 Removal.....................................................................................................2707 Installation................................................................................................2707 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................2707 Removal.....................................................................................................2707 Installation................................................................................................2707 DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING..............................................................................................2708 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2708 FRONT AND REAR DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING.......................................................................2708 Removal.....................................................................................................2708 Installation................................................................................................2708 DOOR PARTING SEAL.......................................................................................................2709 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2709 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2709 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2709 CENTER MUD GUARD........................................................................................................2710 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2710 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2710 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2710 WINDSHIELD MOLDING......................................................................................................2711 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2711 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2711 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2711 BACK DOOR WINDOW MOLDING................................................................................................2712 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2712 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2712 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2712 ROOF SIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................................2714 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2714 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2714 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2714 ROOF RAIL...............................................................................................................2715 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2715 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2715 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2715 ROOF RAIL BRACKET...............................................................................................2715 Removal.....................................................................................................2715 Installation................................................................................................2715 DOOR FINISHER...........................................................................................................2716 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2716 DOOR FINISHER (FRONT AND REAR)..................................................................................2716 Removal.....................................................................................................2716 Installation................................................................................................2717 BODY SIDE TRIM..........................................................................................................2718 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2718 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH.....................................................................................2718 Removal.....................................................................................................2718 Installation................................................................................................2719 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH.....................................................................................2719 Removal.....................................................................................................2719 Installation................................................................................................2719 DASH SIDE FINISHER..............................................................................................2719 Removal.....................................................................................................2719 Installation................................................................................................2719 FRONT PILLAR GARNISH............................................................................................2720 Removal.....................................................................................................2720 Installation................................................................................................2720 KICKING PLATE...................................................................................................2720 Removal.....................................................................................................2720 Installation................................................................................................2720 CENTER MUDGUARD FINISHER (FRONT/REAR)...........................................................................2720 Removal.....................................................................................................2720 Installation................................................................................................2720 FLOOR TRIM..............................................................................................................2721 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2721 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2721 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2722 HEADLINING..............................................................................................................2723 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2723 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2724 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2724 LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM......................................................................................................2725 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2725 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2726 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2726 BACK DOOR TRIM..........................................................................................................2727 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2727 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2727 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2727 BACK DOOR OUTSIDE FINISHER......................................................................................2727 Removal and Installation....................................................................................2727 em..............................................................................................................................2728 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2728 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................2732 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2732 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2732 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2732 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant............................................................................2732 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2732 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2732 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2732 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2732 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................2733 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2733 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2733 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2733 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2735 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2735 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2737 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2740 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise...............................................................................2740 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2741 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2742 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2742 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2742 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.................................................................2743 AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT.............................................................................2743 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2743 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2743 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2743 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2744 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2744 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2744 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2744 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2745 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2745 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2745 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2745 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR...........................................................................................2746 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2746 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2746 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2748 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2748 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2749 Part Installation Direction.............................................................................2749 Intake Manifold Collector (Lower).......................................................................2749 Intake Manifold Collector (Upper).......................................................................2749 Water Hose..............................................................................................2749 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2750 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2751 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2751 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2751 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2751 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2751 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2752 Intake Manifold.........................................................................................2752 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2753 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2753 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2753 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2755 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2755 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2755 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2755 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2755 Heated Oxygen Sensor....................................................................................2755 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2757 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2757 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................2757 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2757 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2759 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2759 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2762 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................2763 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2763 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2765 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2766 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2768 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2769 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2769 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2769 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2769 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2770 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2770 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2770 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2770 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2771 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2772 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2772 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2773 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2774 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2776 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2776 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2778 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2778 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2778 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2779 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE.............................................................................................2781 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2781 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2781 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2785 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2789 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2790 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2790 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2791 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2798 Timing Chain............................................................................................2798 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2798 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2807 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2809 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2809 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2810 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2811 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2811 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2811 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................2811 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2812 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2812 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2813 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2813 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2814 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2816 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2816 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2819 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2821 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2821 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2821 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2821 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2822 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2822 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2823 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2823 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2823 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2823 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2825 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2825 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2825 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2826 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2826 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2827 Outer Diameter of Cylinder Head Bolts...................................................................2827 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2827 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2828 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2829 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2830 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2830 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2831 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2831 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2832 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2832 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2832 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2832 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2832 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2834 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2834 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2835 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2836 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2837 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2837 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................2837 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2838 Outline.................................................................................................2838 Preparation.............................................................................................2838 Engine Room.............................................................................................2838 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2838 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2839 Removal Work............................................................................................2839 Separation Work.........................................................................................2840 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2840 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2840 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................2842 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2842 Outline.................................................................................................2842 Preparation.............................................................................................2843 Engine Room.............................................................................................2843 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2843 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2844 Removal Work............................................................................................2844 Separation Work.........................................................................................2844 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2845 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2845 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2847 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2847 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2848 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2853 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2858 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2858 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2858 When New Cylinder Block Is Used.........................................................................2858 When Cylinder Block Is Reused...........................................................................2859 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2859 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2859 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2859 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod Are Reused...........................................................2859 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2859 Undersize Bearings Usage Guide..........................................................................2860 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2860 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Used.........................................................2860 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Reused...........................................................2860 Main Bearing Selection Table............................................................................2861 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................2862 Undersize Bearing Usage Guide...........................................................................2862 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2863 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................2863 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................2863 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................2863 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................2863 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2863 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................2864 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................2864 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................2864 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................2865 CONNECTING ROD BEARING HOUSING DIAMETER (BIG END)...........................................................2865 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)............................................................2865 Piston Pin Bushing Inner Diameter (Small End)...........................................................2865 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2866 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)........................................................2866 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................2866 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................2867 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................2867 Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter............................................................................2867 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................2868 Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................2868 Re-Boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................2868 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................2868 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................2869 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................2869 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................2869 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2869 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2869 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2870 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................2870 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2870 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2870 MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT...................................................................................2871 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT.........................................................................2871 MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER........................................................................2871 CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER..........................................................................2871 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................2872 OIL JET.....................................................................................................2872 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................2872 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2873 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................2873 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................2873 DRIVE BELT..................................................................................................2874 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD.............................................2874 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................2874 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................2875 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2875 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................2875 Available Valve Lifter..................................................................................2876 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................2877 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................2877 Valve Guide.............................................................................................2878 Valve Seat..............................................................................................2879 Valve Spring............................................................................................2879 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................2880 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................2881 Available Piston........................................................................................2881 Piston Ring.............................................................................................2881 Piston Pin..............................................................................................2881 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................2882 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................2883 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................2884 Undersize...............................................................................................2884 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................2884 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................2885 Undersize...............................................................................................2885 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................2885 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2886 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2886 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2886 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2886 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant............................................................................2886 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2886 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2886 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2886 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2886 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................2887 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2887 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2887 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2887 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2889 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2889 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2891 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2893 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise...............................................................................2893 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2894 ENGINE ROOM COVER...................................................................................................2895 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2895 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2895 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2895 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2896 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2896 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2896 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2896 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2896 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................2896 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................2897 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2897 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley......................................................................2898 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2898 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2898 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2899 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2899 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2899 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2899 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2900 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2900 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2900 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2901 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2901 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2901 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2903 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2903 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2903 Intake Manifold (Lower).................................................................................2903 Intake Manifold (Upper).................................................................................2903 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2903 Water Hose..............................................................................................2903 Vacuum Hose.............................................................................................2903 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2904 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2905 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2905 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2905 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2907 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2907 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2907 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2907 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2907 Heated Oxygen Sensor....................................................................................2907 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2908 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2908 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2908 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2910 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2910 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2910 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2912 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2912 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2912 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2912 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2913 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2913 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2913 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2913 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2914 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2915 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2915 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2915 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2917 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2919 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2919 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2920 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2920 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2920 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2922 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2923 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2923 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2924 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2928 Timing Chain............................................................................................2928 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2928 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2934 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2935 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2935 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2935 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2936 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2936 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2936 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................2937 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2937 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2938 Valve Lifter and Adjusting Shim.........................................................................2938 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2938 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2939 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2941 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2941 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2944 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2948 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2948 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2948 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2948 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2949 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2949 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2949 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2950 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2950 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2950 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2951 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2951 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2951 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2952 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2952 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2953 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................2953 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2953 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2953 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2955 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2955 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2956 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2957 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2957 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2958 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2958 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2958 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2958 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2958 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2959 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2960 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2961 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2962 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2963 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2963 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2963 Outline.................................................................................................2963 Preparation.............................................................................................2963 Engine Room LH..........................................................................................2964 Engine Room RH..........................................................................................2964 Vehicle underbody.......................................................................................2964 Removal Work............................................................................................2965 Separation Work.........................................................................................2965 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2966 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2966 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2967 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2967 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2968 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2971 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2977 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2977 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2977 When New Cylinder Block Is Used:........................................................................2977 When Cylinder Block Is Reused:..........................................................................2977 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2978 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2978 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft Are Used:........................................................2978 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod Are Reused:..........................................................2978 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2978 Under Size Bearings Usage Guide.........................................................................2978 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2979 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Used:........................................................2979 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Reused:..........................................................2980 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 1 and 5 Journal)......................................................2980 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 Journal)...................................................2981 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................2982 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide.......................................................................2982 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2983 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................2983 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................2983 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................2983 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................2983 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2983 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................2983 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................2984 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................2984 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................2985 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................2985 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2985 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................2985 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2986 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................2986 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................2986 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................2987 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................2987 Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter............................................................................2987 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................2988 Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................2988 Re-Boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................2988 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................2988 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................2989 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................2989 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................2989 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2990 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2990 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2990 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................2991 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2991 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2991 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................2992 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................2992 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................2992 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2993 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................2993 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................2993 DRIVE BELTS.................................................................................................2993 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................................................................2993 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................2994 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................2994 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2994 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................2994 Available Adjusting Shims...............................................................................2995 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................2996 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................2997 Valve Guide.............................................................................................2997 Valve Seat..............................................................................................2998 Valve Spring............................................................................................2998 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................2999 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3000 Available Piston........................................................................................3000 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3000 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3000 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3001 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3002 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................3004 Undersize...............................................................................................3004 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................3005 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3005 Undersize...............................................................................................3005 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................3005 ex..............................................................................................................................3006 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3006 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3007 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3007 EXHAUST SYSTEM..........................................................................................................3008 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3008 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3008 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3009 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3009 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3010 fax.............................................................................................................................3012 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3012 2WD.....................................................................................................................3013 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3013 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3013 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3013 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3014 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3014 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3015 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3015 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3015 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3015 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3015 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3016 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3016 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3016 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3017 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3017 AWD.....................................................................................................................3018 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3018 Caution.........................................................................................................3018 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3019 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3019 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3019 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3020 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3020 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3021 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...............................................................................3021 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3021 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3021 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3021 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3022 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3022 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3022 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT...................................................................................................3023 Removal and Installation (Left Side)............................................................................3023 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3023 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3023 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3023 Removal and Installation (Right Side)...........................................................................3024 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3024 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3024 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3025 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)............................................................................3025 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3025 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3025 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3026 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3026 Shaft...................................................................................................3026 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3026 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3026 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3027 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3027 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3029 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)...........................................................................3030 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3030 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3030 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3031 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3031 Shaft...................................................................................................3031 Joint sub-assembly......................................................................................3031 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3031 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3032 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3032 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3033 SERVICE DATA........................................................................................................3036 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3036 Drive Shaft.....................................................................................................3036 Tightening Torque...............................................................................................3036 ffd.............................................................................................................................3038 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3038 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3039 Precautions.........................................................................................................3039 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3040 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3040 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3042 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3043 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3043 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3044 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3044 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3044 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3045 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3046 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3046 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3046 Right Side:.................................................................................................3046 Left Side:..................................................................................................3046 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3046 Right Side:.................................................................................................3046 Left Side:..................................................................................................3046 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3047 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE)...................................................................................3047 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3047 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3047 Removal and Installation (VK45DE)...................................................................................3048 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3048 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3048 Front Final Drive Breather Hose.....................................................................................3049 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (VQ35DE)...............................................................................3049 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (VK45DE)...............................................................................3050 Components..........................................................................................................3051 COMPONENTS (VQ35DE).............................................................................................3051 COMPONENTS (VK45DE).............................................................................................3053 Side Shaft..........................................................................................................3055 BEARING AND OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT................................................................................3055 EXTENSION TUBE REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3056 PRE-DISASSEMBLY INSPECTION......................................................................................3056 Total Preload...............................................................................................3056 Drive Gear to Drive Pinion Gear Backlash....................................................................3057 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3057 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3057 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3058 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3058 REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR AND DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY........................................................3058 REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY............................................................................3059 DIFFERENTIAL CASE DISASSEMBLY...............................................................................3059 INSPECTION..................................................................................................3061 Differential Case Assembly..........................................................................................3061 Installation Drive Pinion Assembly..................................................................................3064 DIFFERENTIAL CASE INSTALLATION..................................................................................3065 TOOTH CONTACT INSPECTION........................................................................................3067 TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN AND HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION.....................................................3068 TOOTH CONTACT ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................3068 TOTAL PRELOAD INSPECTION........................................................................................3070 DRIVE PINION PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................3070 Removal of differential case assembly.......................................................................3070 Removal of drive pinon assembly.............................................................................3070 Preload Adjustment..........................................................................................3070 Reassembly of drive pinion assembly.........................................................................3071 Installation of differential case assembly..................................................................3072 After Inspection....................................................................................................3072 Carrier Cover Installation..........................................................................................3073 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3074 General Specifications..............................................................................................3074 Drive Gear Runout...................................................................................................3074 Side Gear Adjustment................................................................................................3074 Available Side Gear Thrust Washers..................................................................................3074 SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIMS............................................................................3074 Side Retainer Side:.........................................................................................3074 Differential Case to Side Bearing:..........................................................................3074 Drive Pinion Height Adjustment......................................................................................3075 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................3075 Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................3075 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................3075 Total Preload Adjustment............................................................................................3075 fl..............................................................................................................................3076 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3076 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3077 Commercial Service Tool.............................................................................................3077 FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................3078 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3078 General Precautions.................................................................................................3078 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY..............................................................3079 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3079 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3079 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3081 Main and Sub Fuel Level Sensor Unit.........................................................................3082 Quick Connector.............................................................................................3082 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3082 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3083 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3083 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3084 FUEL TANK...............................................................................................................3085 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3085 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3085 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3086 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3086 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3087 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3087 fsu.............................................................................................................................3088 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3088 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3089 Caution.............................................................................................................3089 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3090 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3090 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3091 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3092 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3092 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3093 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3093 INSPECTION OF TRANSVERSE LINK BALL JOINT END PLAY...............................................................3093 STRUT INSPECTION................................................................................................3093 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3093 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3093 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3093 INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES.....................................................3093 Using a CCK Gauge...........................................................................................3093 Toe-In Inspection...........................................................................................3094 Components..........................................................................................................3095 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3096 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3096 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3097 COIL SPRING AND STRUT...................................................................................................3098 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3098 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3098 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3098 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3099 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3099 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3099 Strut Inspection............................................................................................3099 Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection..............................................................3099 Coil Spring Inspection......................................................................................3099 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3100 TRANSVERSE LINK.........................................................................................................3101 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3101 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3101 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3101 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3101 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3101 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3102 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3102 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3102 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3102 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3103 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3103 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3103 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3103 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3103 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER.................................................................................................3104 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3104 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3104 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3104 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3104 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................3105 Wheel Alignment (Unladen)...........................................................................................3105 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3105 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3105 gi..............................................................................................................................3106 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3106 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3108 Description.........................................................................................................3108 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3108 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped).........................3108 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3109 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3109 General Precautions.................................................................................................3109 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst..................................................................................3111 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)........................................................3111 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Required)...........................................................3112 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System............................................3112 Precautions for Hoses...............................................................................................3112 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION...................................................................................3112 HOSE CLAMPING...................................................................................................3113 Precautions for Engine Oils.........................................................................................3113 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................3113 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS............................................................................3113 Precautions for Air Conditioning....................................................................................3113 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................................................................................3114 Description.........................................................................................................3114 Terms...............................................................................................................3114 Units...............................................................................................................3114 Contents............................................................................................................3114 Components..........................................................................................................3115 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................................3115 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................................................3116 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3116 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..................................................................3116 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION..............................................................3117 TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration...................................3117 TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text...........................................3118 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES............................................................3118 How to Read Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................3120 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS...............................................................................................3120 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -................................................................................3121 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3122 Harness Indication..........................................................................................3124 Component Indication........................................................................................3124 Switch Positions............................................................................................3124 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines...................................................................3125 Multiple Switch.............................................................................................3126 Reference Area..............................................................................................3127 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................3128 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT.............................................................................3129 How to Check Terminal...............................................................................................3129 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT..................................................................................3129 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS.........................................................................................3129 Probing from Harness Side...................................................................................3129 Probing from Terminal Side..................................................................................3129 How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal............................................................3130 Waterproof Connector Inspection.............................................................................3131 Terminal Lock Inspection....................................................................................3131 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident.......................................................3132 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................3132 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS.......................................................................................3132 Introduction................................................................................................3132 Vehicle Vibration...........................................................................................3133 Heat Sensitive..............................................................................................3134 Freezing....................................................................................................3134 Water Intrusion.............................................................................................3134 Electrical Load.............................................................................................3134 Cold or Hot Start Up........................................................................................3135 CIRCUIT INSPECTION..............................................................................................3135 Introduction................................................................................................3135 Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit..........................................................................3135 Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit.........................................................................3136 Ground Inspection...........................................................................................3137 Voltage Drop Tests..........................................................................................3137 Control Unit Circuit Test...................................................................................3139 Control Units and Electrical Parts..................................................................................3140 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................................3140 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM..............................................................................................3142 Description.........................................................................................................3142 Function and System Application.....................................................................................3142 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement............................................................................3143 Checking Equipment..................................................................................................3143 CONSULT-II Start Procedure..........................................................................................3143 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit........................................................................3145 INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................3146 LIFTING POINT...........................................................................................................3147 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3147 Garage Jack and Safety Stand........................................................................................3147 2-Pole Lift.........................................................................................................3148 Board-On Lift.......................................................................................................3149 TOW TRUCK TOWING........................................................................................................3150 Tow Truck Towing....................................................................................................3150 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3150 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3151 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)..........................................................................3151 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..........................................................................................3151 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS.....................................................................................3152 Tightening Torque Table.............................................................................................3152 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS..............................................................................3153 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants..........................................................................3153 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION..............................................................................................3154 Model Variation.....................................................................................................3154 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER...........................................................................................3154 IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................3155 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................3155 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER...................................................................................3156 Dimensions..........................................................................................................3156 Wheels & Tires......................................................................................................3156 TERMINOLOGY.............................................................................................................3157 SAE J1930 Terminology List..........................................................................................3157 gw..............................................................................................................................3162 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3162 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3164 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3164 Handling for Adhesive and Primer....................................................................................3164 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3164 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3165 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3165 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3165 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3166 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3166 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3166 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3167 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3167 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3167 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3167 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3168 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3168 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3168 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3168 DOORS...........................................................................................................3168 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3169 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3169 SEATS...........................................................................................................3169 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3169 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3170 WINDSHIELD GLASS........................................................................................................3172 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3172 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3172 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3173 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield........................................................................3173 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING...........................................................................................3174 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3174 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3174 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3175 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM.....................................................................................................3176 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3176 System Description..................................................................................................3177 WITH FRONT POWER WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM.......................................................................3177 WITH FRONT AND REAR WINDOW ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM....................................................................3177 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................3178 Front Driver Side Door......................................................................................3178 Front Passenger Side Door...................................................................................3178 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System............................................3179 Rear Door (LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................3180 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3180 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK........................................................................................3181 With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3181 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3181 POWER WINDOW LOCK...............................................................................................3181 With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System...................................................................3181 With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................................................3181 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3182 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM...............................................................................................3182 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.................................................................3182 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3183 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3183 Schematic (With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System)...............................................................3184 Wiring Diagram —WINDOW— (With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System).................................................3185 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System....................................3189 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch Sy...................3190 Terminal and Reference Value for Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) / With Front Power Wi...................3191 Schematic (With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System)......................................................3192 Wiring Diagram —WINDOW— (With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System)........................................3193 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch..................................3198 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti...................3199 Terminal and Reference Value for (Front and Rear) Power Window Switch / With Front and Rear Windo...................3200 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3200 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................3201 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3202 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3202 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................3202 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front Power Window Anti-pinch System.........................................3203 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti- pinch System...............................3204 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3205 Power Window Main Switch Power Supply Circuit Check.................................................................3206 Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check....................................3207 Rear Power Window Switch (LH or RH) Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check / With Front and Rear P...................3208 Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) Circuit Check................................................................3209 Front Power Window Motor (Passenger Side) Circuit Check.............................................................3210 Rear Power Window Motor (LH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-pinch Power Window System..............................3211 Rear Power Window Motor (RH) Circuit Check / With Front Anti-pinch Power Window System..............................3213 Rear Power Window Motor (LH or RH) Circuit Check / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch Sy...................3216 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Driver Side)............................................................................3217 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Passenger Side).........................................................................3218 Limit Switch Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Anti-pinch System..................................3220 Encoder Circuit Check (Driver Side).................................................................................3222 Encoder Circuit Check (Passenger Side)..............................................................................3224 Encoder Circuit Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System..........................3226 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................3228 Front Door Key Cylinder Switch Check................................................................................3230 Power Window Serial Link Check (Passenger Side).....................................................................3232 Power Window Serial Link Check (Rear LH or RH) / With Front and Rear Power Window Anti-pinch System.................3234 Power Window Lock Switch Check......................................................................................3234 SIDE WINDOW GLASS.......................................................................................................3235 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3235 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3235 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3236 Repairing Water Leaks.......................................................................................3236 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR..........................................................................................3237 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3237 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3237 Removal.....................................................................................................3237 Installation................................................................................................3238 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3238 Removal.....................................................................................................3238 Installation................................................................................................3238 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3239 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3239 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3239 Disassembly.................................................................................................3239 Assembly....................................................................................................3239 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3239 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH.........................................................................................3239 Setting of Limit Switch.....................................................................................3239 Resetting...................................................................................................3239 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3239 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR...........................................................................................3241 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3241 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3241 Removal.....................................................................................................3241 Installation................................................................................................3242 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3242 Removal.....................................................................................................3242 Installation................................................................................................3243 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3243 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3243 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3243 Disassembly.................................................................................................3243 Assembly....................................................................................................3243 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3243 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH (WITH ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ONLY)...........................................................3243 Resetting...................................................................................................3243 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3244 INSIDE MIRROR...........................................................................................................3245 Wiring Diagram—I/MIRR—.............................................................................................3245 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3246 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3246 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3246 COMPASS.........................................................................................................3246 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER....................................................................................................3247 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3247 System Description..................................................................................................3247 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3249 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3249 Schematic...........................................................................................................3250 Wiring Diagram —DEF—................................................................................................3251 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3255 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R...........................................................................3255 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3255 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................3256 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3257 Display Item List...........................................................................................3257 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3257 Display Item List...........................................................................................3257 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3258 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check...........................................................................3258 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check...........................................................................3259 Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3261 Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check..................................................................................3263 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check.....................................................................3264 Driver Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check......................................................................3265 Passenger Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check...................................................................3266 Rear Window Defogger Signal Check...................................................................................3267 Filament Check......................................................................................................3268 Filament Repair.....................................................................................................3268 REPAIR EQUIPMENT................................................................................................3268 REPAIRING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3269 DOOR MIRROR.............................................................................................................3270 Door Mirror (Only Manual Operation).................................................................................3270 WRING DIAGRAM—MIRROR— FOR MANUAL OPERATION DOOR MIRROR.........................................................3270 Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Door Mirror.................................................................3271 WRING DIAGRAM–MIRROR– FOR AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER INTERLOCKING DOOR MIRROR..................................3272 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3274 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3274 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3274 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3274 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3274 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3275 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 idx.............................................................................................................................3276 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3277 A.......................................................................................................................3277 B.......................................................................................................................3277 C.......................................................................................................................3278 D.......................................................................................................................3278 E.......................................................................................................................3278 F.......................................................................................................................3279 G.......................................................................................................................3279 H.......................................................................................................................3279 I.......................................................................................................................3280 J.......................................................................................................................3280 K.......................................................................................................................3280 L.......................................................................................................................3280 M.......................................................................................................................3281 N.......................................................................................................................3281 O.......................................................................................................................3281 P.......................................................................................................................3281 R.......................................................................................................................3282 S.......................................................................................................................3282 T.......................................................................................................................3282 U.......................................................................................................................3283 V.......................................................................................................................3283 W.......................................................................................................................3283 ip..............................................................................................................................3284 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3284 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3285 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3285 Precautions.........................................................................................................3285 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3286 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3286 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3286 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3287 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3287 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3287 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3288 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3288 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3288 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3288 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3289 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3289 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3289 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3289 DOORS...........................................................................................................3289 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3290 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3290 SEATS...........................................................................................................3290 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3290 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3291 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3293 Component Parts Drawing.............................................................................................3293 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3294 WORK STEP.......................................................................................................3294 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3295 (A) Front Kicking Plate (LH/RH).............................................................................3295 (B) Dash Side Finisher (LH/RH)..............................................................................3295 (C) Front Pillar Garnish (LH/RH)............................................................................3295 (D) A/T Select Lever Knob...................................................................................3295 (E) Instrument Clock Finisher...............................................................................3295 (F) A/T Console Finisher....................................................................................3295 (G) Console Finisher (LH/RH)................................................................................3295 (H) Center Console..........................................................................................3295 (I) Instrument Lower Cover..................................................................................3296 (J) Instrument Passenger Lower Panel........................................................................3296 (K) Instrument Driver Lower Panel...........................................................................3296 (L) Steering Column Front Lower Cover.......................................................................3296 (M) Steering Column Lower Cover.............................................................................3296 (N) Steering Column Upper Cover.............................................................................3297 (O) Wiper and Washer Switch.................................................................................3297 (P) Lighting and Turn Signal Switch.........................................................................3297 (Q) Steering Lock Escutcheon................................................................................3297 (R) Combination Meter Assembly..............................................................................3297 (S) Instrument Side Panel (LH/RH)...........................................................................3297 (T) Cluster Lid C...........................................................................................3298 (U) Display Unit and Audio Unit.............................................................................3298 (V) Front Defroster Grille (LH/RH)..........................................................................3298 (W) Combination Meter Bracket...............................................................................3298 (X) Side Ventilation (LH/RH)................................................................................3299 (Y) Instrument Panel and Pad................................................................................3299 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3300 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3300 A/T CONSOLE FINISHER............................................................................................3300 Disassembly.................................................................................................3300 Assembly....................................................................................................3300 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3301 Disassembly.................................................................................................3301 Assembly....................................................................................................3301 INSTRUMENT PASSENGER LOWER PANEL................................................................................3302 Disassembly.................................................................................................3302 Assembly....................................................................................................3302 lan.............................................................................................................................3304 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3304 CAN.....................................................................................................................3307 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3307 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................3307 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3307 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II...........................................................................3307 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3307 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3307 Precautions For Harness Repair..................................................................................3308 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3308 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................3309 System Description..............................................................................................3309 CAN Communication Unit..........................................................................................3309 TYPE 1/TYPE2................................................................................................3309 System diagram..........................................................................................3309 Input/output signal chart...............................................................................3310 TYPE 3......................................................................................................3312 System diagram..........................................................................................3312 Input/output signal chart...............................................................................3312 TYPE 4/TYPE5................................................................................................3316 System diagram..........................................................................................3316 Input/output signal chart...............................................................................3317 TYPE 6......................................................................................................3319 System diagram..........................................................................................3319 Input/output signal chart...............................................................................3319 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1).................................................................................................3324 System Description..............................................................................................3324 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3324 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3325 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3327 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3329 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3331 Case 1..................................................................................................3331 Case 2..................................................................................................3332 Case 3..................................................................................................3333 Case 4..................................................................................................3334 Case 5..................................................................................................3335 Case 6..................................................................................................3336 Case 7..................................................................................................3337 Case 8..................................................................................................3338 Case 9..................................................................................................3339 Case 10.................................................................................................3340 Case 11.................................................................................................3341 Case 12.................................................................................................3342 Case 13.................................................................................................3343 Case 14.................................................................................................3343 Case 15.................................................................................................3344 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3344 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3344 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3345 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3345 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3346 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3346 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3347 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3347 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3348 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3348 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3349 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3349 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3350 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3354 Component Inspection............................................................................................3354 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3354 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2).................................................................................................3355 System Description..............................................................................................3355 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3355 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3356 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3358 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3360 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3362 Case 1..................................................................................................3362 Case 2..................................................................................................3363 Case 3..................................................................................................3364 Case 4..................................................................................................3365 Case 5..................................................................................................3366 Case 6..................................................................................................3367 Case 7..................................................................................................3368 Case 8..................................................................................................3369 Case 9..................................................................................................3370 Case 10.................................................................................................3371 Case 11.................................................................................................3372 Case 12.................................................................................................3373 Case 13.................................................................................................3374 Case 14.................................................................................................3375 Case 15.................................................................................................3376 Case 16.................................................................................................3376 Case 17.................................................................................................3377 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3377 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3377 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3378 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3379 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3379 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3380 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3380 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3381 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3381 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3382 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3382 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3383 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3383 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3384 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3385 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3389 Component Inspection............................................................................................3389 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3389 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3).................................................................................................3390 System Description..............................................................................................3390 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3390 Schematic.......................................................................................................3391 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3392 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3395 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3397 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3400 Case 1..................................................................................................3400 Case 2..................................................................................................3401 Case 3..................................................................................................3402 Case 4..................................................................................................3403 Case 5..................................................................................................3404 Case 6..................................................................................................3405 Case 7..................................................................................................3406 Case 8..................................................................................................3407 Case 9..................................................................................................3408 Case 10.................................................................................................3409 Case 11.................................................................................................3410 Case 12.................................................................................................3411 Case 13.................................................................................................3412 Case 14.................................................................................................3413 Case 15.................................................................................................3414 Case 16.................................................................................................3415 Case 17.................................................................................................3416 Case 18.................................................................................................3417 Case 19.................................................................................................3418 Case 20.................................................................................................3418 Case 21.................................................................................................3419 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3419 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3420 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3420 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3421 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3422 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3422 Display Control Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3423 Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit Circuit Check............................................................3423 ICC Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................................3424 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3424 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3425 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3425 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3426 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3426 ICC Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................3427 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3427 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3428 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3429 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3430 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3435 Component Inspection............................................................................................3435 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3435 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4).................................................................................................3436 System Description..............................................................................................3436 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3436 Schematic.......................................................................................................3437 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3438 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3441 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3443 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3445 Case 1..................................................................................................3445 Case 2..................................................................................................3446 Case 3..................................................................................................3447 Case 4..................................................................................................3448 Case 5..................................................................................................3449 Case 6..................................................................................................3450 Case 7..................................................................................................3451 Case 8..................................................................................................3452 Case 9..................................................................................................3453 Case 10.................................................................................................3454 Case 11.................................................................................................3455 Case 12.................................................................................................3456 Case 13.................................................................................................3457 Case 14.................................................................................................3458 Case 15.................................................................................................3458 Case 16.................................................................................................3459 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3459 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3459 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3460 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3460 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3461 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3461 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3462 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3462 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3463 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3463 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3464 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3464 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3465 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3466 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3469 Component Inspection............................................................................................3469 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3469 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5).................................................................................................3470 System Description..............................................................................................3470 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3470 Schematic.......................................................................................................3471 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3472 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3475 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3477 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3479 Case 1..................................................................................................3479 Case 2..................................................................................................3480 Case 3..................................................................................................3481 Case 4..................................................................................................3482 Case 5..................................................................................................3483 Case 6..................................................................................................3484 Case 7..................................................................................................3485 Case 8..................................................................................................3486 Case 9..................................................................................................3487 Case 10.................................................................................................3488 Case 11.................................................................................................3489 Case 12.................................................................................................3490 Case 13.................................................................................................3491 Case 14.................................................................................................3492 Case 15.................................................................................................3493 Case 16.................................................................................................3494 Case 17.................................................................................................3494 Case 18.................................................................................................3495 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3495 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3495 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3496 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3497 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3497 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3498 Display Unit Circuit Check......................................................................................3498 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3499 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3499 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3500 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3500 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3501 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3501 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3502 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3503 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3503 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3508 Component Inspection............................................................................................3508 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3508 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6).................................................................................................3509 System Description..............................................................................................3509 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3509 Schematic.......................................................................................................3510 Wiring Diagram - CAN -..........................................................................................3511 Work Flow.......................................................................................................3514 CHECK SHEET.................................................................................................3516 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3519 Case 1..................................................................................................3519 Case 2..................................................................................................3520 Case 3..................................................................................................3521 Case 4..................................................................................................3522 Case 5..................................................................................................3523 Case 6..................................................................................................3524 Case 7..................................................................................................3525 Case 8..................................................................................................3526 Case 9..................................................................................................3527 Case 10.................................................................................................3528 Case 11.................................................................................................3529 Case 12.................................................................................................3530 Case 13.................................................................................................3531 Case 14.................................................................................................3532 Case 15.................................................................................................3533 Case 16.................................................................................................3534 Case 17.................................................................................................3535 Case 18.................................................................................................3536 Case 19.................................................................................................3537 Case 20.................................................................................................3538 Case 21.................................................................................................3539 Case 22.................................................................................................3540 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector...............................................................3540 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................3541 Circuit Check Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..............3541 Circuit Check Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit................3542 ECM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3543 TCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3543 Display Control Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3544 Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit Circuit Check............................................................3544 AWD Control Unit Circuit Check..................................................................................3545 ICC Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................................3545 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Check..............................................................................3546 Data Link Connector Circuit Check...............................................................................3546 BCM Circuit Check...............................................................................................3547 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................3547 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Check........................................................................3548 ICC Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................3548 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check.....................................................3549 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check..........................................................................3549 IPDM E/R Circuit Check..........................................................................................3550 CAN Communication Circuit Check.................................................................................3551 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check...........................................................................3556 Component Inspection............................................................................................3556 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION....................................................................3556 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)............................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 83 lt..............................................................................................................................3558 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3558 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3562 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3562 General precautions for service operations..........................................................................3563 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3563 HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -.................................................................................................3564 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3564 System Description..................................................................................................3564 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3564 Low Beam Operation..........................................................................................3565 High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation.................................................................3565 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3566 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3566 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)..............................................................................3566 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.........................................................................................3566 XENON HEADLAMP..................................................................................................3566 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3566 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3566 Schematic...........................................................................................................3567 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —...........................................................................................3568 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3572 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3573 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3573 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3574 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3574 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3575 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3575 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3576 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3576 Display Item List...........................................................................................3576 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3576 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3576 Display Item List...........................................................................................3577 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3577 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3577 Display Item List...........................................................................................3577 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3578 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3578 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................3579 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3579 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3579 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3579 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3580 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3580 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (Both Sides)..................................................................3580 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (One Side)....................................................................3582 High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate........................................................................3583 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)..................................................................3583 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (One Side)....................................................................3586 Headlamp RH Low Beam and High Beam Do Not Illuminate................................................................3587 Headlamp LH Low Beam and High Beam Do Not Illuminate................................................................3587 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF...........................................................................................3588 CAUTION:............................................................................................................3590 Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................3590 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3591 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING....................................................................................3591 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM..........................................................................................3591 ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)...................................................3592 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3592 HEADLAMP HIGH/LOW BEAM..........................................................................................3592 PARKING LAMP (CLEARANCE LAMP)...................................................................................3593 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP..........................................................................................3593 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP..........................................................................................3593 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3593 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3593 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3593 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3594 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3594 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3594 DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM....................................................................................................3595 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3595 System Description..................................................................................................3595 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3595 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION.........................................................................................3596 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3596 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION............................................................................................3596 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3596 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3596 Schematic...........................................................................................................3597 Wiring Diagram — DTRL —.............................................................................................3598 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3602 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3603 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3603 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3603 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT.........................................................................3604 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................3605 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3605 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3606 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3606 Display Item List...........................................................................................3606 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3607 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3607 Display Item List...........................................................................................3607 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly.....................................................................3608 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3610 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3610 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3610 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3610 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.......................................................................................................3611 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3611 System Description..................................................................................................3611 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3611 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3612 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3612 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION............................................................................................3612 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3612 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3612 Major Components and Functions......................................................................................3612 Schematic...........................................................................................................3613 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —...........................................................................................3614 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3617 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3618 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3619 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3619 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS........................................................................................3619 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3619 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3620 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3621 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3621 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3621 Work Support Setting Item...................................................................................3622 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3622 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3622 Display Item List...........................................................................................3622 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3623 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3623 Display Item List...........................................................................................3623 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3623 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3623 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................3624 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3624 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3624 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3625 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3625 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3625 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................3625 Lighting Switch Inspection..........................................................................................3626 Optical Sensor System Inspection....................................................................................3626 Removal and Installation for Optical Sensor.........................................................................3628 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3628 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3628 HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL.................................................................................................3629 Schematic...........................................................................................................3629 Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —............................................................................................3630 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3633 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3633 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3633 Switch Circuit Inspection...........................................................................................3633 FRONT FOG LAMP..........................................................................................................3634 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3634 System Description..................................................................................................3634 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3634 Fog Lamp Operation..........................................................................................3635 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3635 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3635 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3635 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3635 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —............................................................................................3636 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3638 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3639 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3639 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3639 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3639 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................3640 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)......................................................................3641 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side).......................................................................3643 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3644 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3645 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3645 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3645 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3645 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS....................................................................................3646 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3646 System Description..................................................................................................3646 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3646 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION...........................................................................................3646 LH Turn.....................................................................................................3647 RH Turn.....................................................................................................3647 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION...........................................................................................3647 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION...........................................................................3648 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3649 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3649 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3649 Schematic...........................................................................................................3650 Wiring Diagram — TURN —.............................................................................................3651 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3654 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3655 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3656 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3656 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................3657 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3657 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3658 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3658 Display Item List...........................................................................................3658 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3658 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3658 Display Item List...........................................................................................3658 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate...................................................................................3659 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate..............................................................................3660 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operate...................................................3662 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate.........................................................................3664 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)...........................................................................3664 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)............................................................................3664 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp..................................................................3664 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...................................................................3664 Removal and Installation of Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit......................................................3664 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3664 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3664 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH.........................................................................................3665 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3665 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3665 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3665 HAZARD SWITCH...........................................................................................................3666 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3666 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3666 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3666 COMBINATION SWITCH......................................................................................................3667 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —...........................................................................................3667 Combination Switch Reading Function.................................................................................3668 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................3668 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3668 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3669 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3669 Display Item List...........................................................................................3669 Combination Switch Inspection.......................................................................................3670 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3672 STOP LAMP...............................................................................................................3673 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3673 System Description..................................................................................................3673 Schematic...........................................................................................................3674 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —...........................................................................................3675 Stop Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3678 High-Mounted Stop Lamp..............................................................................................3680 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3680 Stop Lamp...........................................................................................................3680 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3680 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3680 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3680 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3680 STEP LAMP...............................................................................................................3681 Front Door Step Lamp................................................................................................3681 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3681 Rear Door Step Lamp.................................................................................................3681 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3681 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................................................................3682 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —...........................................................................................3682 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3683 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3683 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS...................................................................................3684 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3684 System Description..................................................................................................3684 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH....................................................................................3685 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3686 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3686 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3686 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3686 Schematic...........................................................................................................3687 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —...........................................................................................3688 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3693 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3694 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3694 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3694 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3694 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................3695 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate.............................................................3696 Tail Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3701 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)....................................3702 License Plate Lamp..................................................................................................3702 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3702 Front Parking (Clearance) Lamp......................................................................................3703 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3703 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3703 Tail Lamp...........................................................................................................3703 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3703 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3703 Front Side Marker Lamp..............................................................................................3703 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3703 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3703 Rear Side Marker Lamp...............................................................................................3703 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3703 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3703 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3703 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3703 REAR COMBINATION LAMP...................................................................................................3704 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3704 REAR FENDER SIDE (REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB)...................................................................3704 BACK DOOR SIDE (BACK-UP LAMP)...................................................................................3704 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3704 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3704 Rear Fender Side............................................................................................3704 Trunk Lid Side..............................................................................................3705 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3705 VANITY MIRROR LAMP......................................................................................................3706 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3706 MAP LAMP................................................................................................................3707 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3707 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3707 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3707 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3707 PERSONAL LAMP...........................................................................................................3708 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3708 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3708 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3708 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3708 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3709 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3709 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3709 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3709 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3709 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................3710 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................3710 GLOVE BOX LAMP..........................................................................................................3711 Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation..........................................................................3711 ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION....................................................................................................3712 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................3712 CIGARETTE LIGHTER ILLUMINATION..........................................................................................3713 Bulb Replacement and Removal and Installation.......................................................................3713 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP......................................................................................................3714 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3714 System Description..................................................................................................3714 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................3714 SWITCH OPERATION................................................................................................3716 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION.......................................................................................3716 Without Intelligent Key System..............................................................................3716 With Intelligent Key System.................................................................................3717 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3717 Schematic...........................................................................................................3719 Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —...........................................................................................3721 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3729 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3730 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3730 CHECK FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.......................................................................3730 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................3731 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3731 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3732 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3732 Display Item List...........................................................................................3732 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3732 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3732 Display Item List...........................................................................................3732 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3733 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3733 Display Item List...........................................................................................3733 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate.........................................................................3733 Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate...................................................................................3735 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate..............................................................................3737 Ignition key Hole illumination Control Does Not Operate.............................................................3738 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate.......................................................................................3739 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate..............................................................................3740 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3740 ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3740 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3741 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3741 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3741 ROOM LAMP.......................................................................................................3741 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3741 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3741 ILLUMINATION............................................................................................................3742 System Description..................................................................................................3742 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH.......................................................................3742 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3743 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3743 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3743 Schematic...........................................................................................................3744 Wiring Diagram — ILL —..............................................................................................3746 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3754 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH.....................................................................................3754 GLOVE BOX LAMP..................................................................................................3754 FRONT DOOR INSIDE ILLUMINATION..................................................................................3754 BULB SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................3755 Headlamp............................................................................................................3755 Exterior Lamp.......................................................................................................3755 Interior Lamp/Illumination..........................................................................................3755 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 lu..............................................................................................................................3756 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3756 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................3758 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3758 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3758 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3758 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3759 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3759 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3759 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3760 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3760 System Drawing..................................................................................................3761 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3762 Inspection......................................................................................................3762 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3762 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3762 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3762 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3763 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3764 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3765 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3765 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3765 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3765 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3765 OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)............................................................................................3767 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3767 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3767 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3767 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3767 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3769 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3769 2WD MODEL...................................................................................................3769 AWD MODEL...................................................................................................3770 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3770 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3770 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3770 Relief Valve............................................................................................3770 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3771 2WD Model...............................................................................................3771 AWD Model...............................................................................................3771 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3771 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3772 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3772 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3772 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3772 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3772 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3772 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3772 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3773 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3773 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3773 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3774 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3775 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3775 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.........................................................................................3775 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3775 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3775 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3775 VK45DE..................................................................................................................3776 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3776 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3776 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3776 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3777 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3777 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3777 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3778 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3778 System Drawing..................................................................................................3779 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3780 Inspection......................................................................................................3780 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3780 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3780 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3780 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3780 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3781 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3783 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3783 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3783 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3783 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3783 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3784 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3784 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3784 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3784 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3784 Relief Valve............................................................................................3784 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3785 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3785 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3786 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3786 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3786 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3786 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3787 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3787 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3787 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3787 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3787 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3788 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3788 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3789 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3789 OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................3789 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3789 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3789 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3789 ma..............................................................................................................................3790 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3790 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3792 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3792 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3792 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................3793 Explanation of General Maintenance..................................................................................3793 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................3796 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance................................................................................3796 Schedule 1..........................................................................................................3797 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3797 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3798 Schedule 2..........................................................................................................3799 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3799 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3800 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......................................................................................3801 Fluids and Lubricants...............................................................................................3801 SAE Viscosity Number................................................................................................3802 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL.............................................................................................3802 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio...................................................................................3802 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3803 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3803 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................3803 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.....................................................................3804 AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT.................................................................................3804 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3804 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3804 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3805 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3806 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3806 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3806 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3806 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3806 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3807 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3807 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3808 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3808 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3808 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3808 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3809 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3809 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3809 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VK45DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3810 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3810 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................3810 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3810 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3811 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3811 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3812 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3813 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3813 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3813 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3813 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3814 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3814 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3814 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3814 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3815 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3815 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3815 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3816 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3816 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE............................................................................................3817 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3817 Checking A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3817 Changing A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3819 Checking Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3819 Changing Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3820 Checking Propeller Shaft............................................................................................3820 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3820 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3821 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................3821 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3821 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................3821 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................3823 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks................................................................................3823 Checking Brake Lines and Cables.....................................................................................3823 Changing Brake Fluid................................................................................................3823 Checking Disc Brake.................................................................................................3824 ROTOR...........................................................................................................3824 CALIPER.........................................................................................................3824 PAD.............................................................................................................3824 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage..................................................................................3824 STEERING GEAR...................................................................................................3824 STEERING LINKAGE................................................................................................3824 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines.............................................................................3825 Axle and Suspension Parts...........................................................................................3825 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................3826 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch............................................................................3826 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters......................................................3827 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3828 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3828 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VQ35DE)............................................................................3828 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VK45DE)............................................................................3828 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)..................................................................3828 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)..................................................................3828 RADIATOR........................................................................................................3828 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3828 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3829 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3829 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3829 WHEEL BALANCE...................................................................................................3829 pb..............................................................................................................................3830 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3830 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................................................3831 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................3831 PEDAL STROKE....................................................................................................3831 INSPECT COMPONENTS..............................................................................................3831 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................3831 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL...................................................................................................3832 Components..........................................................................................................3832 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3832 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3832 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3833 PARKING BRAKE SHOE......................................................................................................3834 Components..........................................................................................................3834 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3834 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3834 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3835 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3835 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3836 Parking Drum Brake..................................................................................................3836 Parking Brake Control...............................................................................................3836 pg..............................................................................................................................3838 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3838 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................3840 Schematic...........................................................................................................3840 Wiring Diagram - POWER -............................................................................................3841 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION...........................................................3841 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”..........................................................3847 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”.....................................................3849 Fuse................................................................................................................3854 Fusible Link........................................................................................................3854 Circuit Breaker.....................................................................................................3854 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)............................................................3855 System Description..................................................................................................3855 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R..................................................................................3855 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL..................................................................................3855 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL.........................................................................................3856 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3856 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3856 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction....................................................................3856 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................3857 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................3857 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................3858 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3858 Display Item List...........................................................................................3858 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3859 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3859 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3859 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3859 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3859 Auto Active Test....................................................................................................3861 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3861 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3861 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE.............................................................................3861 Concept of Auto Active Test.................................................................................3862 Schematic...........................................................................................................3863 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement.......................................................................................3864 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection............................................................................3865 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis).........................................................................3866 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R................................................................................3867 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3867 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3867 GROUND..................................................................................................................3868 Ground Distribution.................................................................................................3868 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3868 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3871 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3874 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3875 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3876 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3877 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3878 BODY NO.2 HARNESS...............................................................................................3881 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3882 HARNESS.................................................................................................................3883 Harness Layout......................................................................................................3883 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT......................................................................................3883 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3884 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3885 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3888 Engine Compartment..........................................................................................3888 Passenger Compartment.......................................................................................3890 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3891 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3892 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3893 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3895 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3897 BODY NO.2 HARNESS...............................................................................................3899 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3900 FRONT DOOR HARNESS..............................................................................................3901 LH Side.....................................................................................................3901 RH Side.....................................................................................................3901 REAR DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3902 LH Side.....................................................................................................3902 RH Side.....................................................................................................3902 BACK DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3903 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)...................................................................................3904 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................................................................................3907 Electrical Units Location...........................................................................................3907 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................3907 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................3908 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................3910 HARNESS CONNECTOR.......................................................................................................3911 Description.........................................................................................................3911 HERNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)............................................................................3911 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................3912 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)...................................................................................................3913 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3913 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................3914 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3914 SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION)...........................................................................................3916 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3916 STANDARDIZED RELAY......................................................................................................3918 Description.........................................................................................................3918 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS................................................................3918 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS.....................................................................................3918 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B).........................................................................................3920 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3920 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................3921 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3921 pr..............................................................................................................................3922 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3922 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3923 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3923 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3923 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3924 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3924 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT...................................................................................................3925 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................3925 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3925 APPEARANCE CHECKING.............................................................................................3925 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3925 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3925 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3926 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3926 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT....................................................................................................3927 Service Information.................................................................................................3927 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................3927 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3927 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................3927 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3928 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3929 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3929 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3931 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3932 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3932 Center Bearing..............................................................................................3932 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3933 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3935 General Specifications..............................................................................................3935 2WD MODEL.......................................................................................................3935 AWD MODEL.......................................................................................................3935 Front Propeller Shaft...............................................................................................3935 JOURNAL AXIAL PLAY..............................................................................................3935 PROPELLER SHAFT RUNOUT LIMIT....................................................................................3935 Rear Propeller Shaft................................................................................................3935 JOURNAL AXIAL PLAY..............................................................................................3935 PROPELLER SHAFT RUNOUT LIMIT....................................................................................3935 ps..............................................................................................................................3936 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3936 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3938 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3938 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3938 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3938 Precautions for Steering System.....................................................................................3938 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3940 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3940 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3941 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3942 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3942 POWER STEERING FLUID....................................................................................................3943 Checking Fluid Level................................................................................................3943 Checking Fluid Leakage..............................................................................................3943 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System.......................................................................................3943 STEERING WHEEL..........................................................................................................3945 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3945 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION..............................................................................3945 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY....................................................................................3945 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL.....................................................................3945 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE...........................................................................3945 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..............................................................................3946 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3946 STEERING COLUMN.........................................................................................................3947 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3947 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3947 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3949 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3949 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3949 Components (without Automatic Drive Positioner).....................................................................3950 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3950 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3950 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3951 Components (with Automatic Drive Positioner)........................................................................3952 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3953 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3953 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3953 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.........................................................................................3954 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3954 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3954 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3955 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3956 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3957 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3958 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3960 Boot........................................................................................................3960 Rack........................................................................................................3960 Sub-Gear Assembly...........................................................................................3960 Gear Housing Assembly.......................................................................................3960 Outer Socket and Inner Socket...............................................................................3960 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3961 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP.................................................................................................3966 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3966 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VQ35DE MODELS)....................................................................3966 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VK45DE MODELS)....................................................................3966 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE models)............................................................................3967 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3967 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3968 Removal and Installation (VK45DE models)............................................................................3968 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3968 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3968 Disassembly and Assembly (VQ35DE models)............................................................................3968 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3968 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3969 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3969 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3969 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3969 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3969 Disassembly and Assembly (VK45DE models)............................................................................3972 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3972 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3972 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3973 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3973 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3973 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3973 HYDRAULIC LINE..........................................................................................................3976 Components..........................................................................................................3976 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3978 Component...........................................................................................................3979 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3980 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3981 Steering Wheel......................................................................................................3981 Steering Angle......................................................................................................3981 Steering Column.....................................................................................................3981 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket..............................................................................3981 Steering Gear.......................................................................................................3982 Oil Pump............................................................................................................3982 Steering Fluid......................................................................................................3982 rax.............................................................................................................................3984 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3984 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3985 Caution.............................................................................................................3985 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3986 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3986 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3986 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3987 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3987 WHEEL HUB...............................................................................................................3988 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3988 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION........................................................................................3988 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3988 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3988 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3989 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3989 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3989 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3989 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3989 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................3989 Bushing.....................................................................................................3990 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3990 Wheel Hub...................................................................................................3990 Axle........................................................................................................3990 Back Plate..................................................................................................3990 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3990 Bushing.....................................................................................................3990 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................3991 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................3991 REAR DRIVE SHAFT........................................................................................................3992 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3992 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3992 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3992 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3992 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3993 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3993 Final Drive Side............................................................................................3993 Wheel Side..................................................................................................3994 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3994 Shaft.......................................................................................................3994 Joint sub-assembly..........................................................................................3994 Sliding Joint Side (Housing)................................................................................3994 Ball Cage...................................................................................................3994 Steel Ball..................................................................................................3994 Inner Race..................................................................................................3994 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3995 Final Drive Side............................................................................................3995 Wheel Side..................................................................................................3996 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................3998 Wheel Bearing.......................................................................................................3998 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................3998 rf..............................................................................................................................4000 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4000 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4001 Precautions.........................................................................................................4001 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4002 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4002 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4002 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4003 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4003 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4003 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4004 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4004 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4004 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4004 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4005 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4005 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4005 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4005 DOORS...........................................................................................................4005 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4006 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4006 SEATS...........................................................................................................4006 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4006 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4007 SUNROOF.................................................................................................................4009 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4009 System Description..................................................................................................4010 TILT UP / SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................4010 TILT DOWN / SLIDE OPEN OPERATION................................................................................4010 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................4010 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................4010 ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION.............................................................................................4011 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE..........................................................................................4011 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE........................................................................................4011 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4012 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4012 Wiring Diagram — SROOF —............................................................................................4013 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................4014 Terminals and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly............................................................4014 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4015 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure.....................................................................................4015 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4016 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4016 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................4016 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................4017 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check of BCM........................................................................4017 Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check........................................................4018 Sunroof Switch System Check.........................................................................................4019 Door Switch Check...................................................................................................4021 Wind Deflector Inspection...........................................................................................4023 Link and Wire Assembly..............................................................................................4023 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................4023 LID WEATHERSTRIP OVERLAP ADJUSTMENT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT.............................................4024 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4024 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY...........................................................................................4026 Removal.....................................................................................................4026 Installation................................................................................................4027 GLASS LID.......................................................................................................4027 Removal.....................................................................................................4027 Installation................................................................................................4027 SUNSHADE........................................................................................................4028 Removal.....................................................................................................4028 Installation................................................................................................4028 WIND DEFLECTOR..................................................................................................4028 Removal.....................................................................................................4028 Installation................................................................................................4028 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY..........................................................................................4028 Removal.....................................................................................................4028 Installation................................................................................................4028 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 rfd.............................................................................................................................4030 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4030 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4031 Precautions.........................................................................................................4031 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4032 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4032 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4034 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4035 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4035 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4036 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4036 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4036 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4036 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4038 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4038 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4038 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4039 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................4040 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4040 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4040 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4040 Components..........................................................................................................4041 R200 2-PINION...................................................................................................4041 Pre-Inspection......................................................................................................4042 TOTAL PRELOAD...................................................................................................4042 DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH.............................................................................4042 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................4042 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................4043 TOOTH CONTACT...................................................................................................4043 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4043 REMOVAL OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY...........................................................................4043 REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY................................................................................4044 DISASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY.......................................................................4046 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4047 ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE.................................................................................4048 Thrust Washer Selection.....................................................................................4048 SIDE BEARING PRELOAD............................................................................................4049 PINION GEAR HEIGHT..............................................................................................4050 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer Selection....................................................................4052 TOOTH CONTACT...................................................................................................4053 ASSEMBLY OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY..........................................................................4054 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY...........................................................................4055 INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY......................................................................4057 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4060 General Specifications..............................................................................................4060 Drive Gear Runout...................................................................................................4060 Side Gear Adjustment................................................................................................4060 AVAILABLE SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS..............................................................................4060 Drive Pinion Height Adjustment......................................................................................4060 AVAILABLE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHERS.......................................................................4060 Drive Pinion Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................4060 Side Bearing Preload Adjustment.....................................................................................4061 SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING WASHERS..................................................................................4061 Total Preload Adjustment............................................................................................4061 Companion Flange....................................................................................................4061 rsu.............................................................................................................................4062 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4062 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4063 Cautions............................................................................................................4063 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4064 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4064 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4064 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4065 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4065 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4066 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4066 INSPECTION OF SUSPENSION ARM BALL JOINT END PLAY................................................................4066 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.......................................................................................4066 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................4066 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4066 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4066 CAMBER INSPECTION...............................................................................................4066 TOE-IN..........................................................................................................4067 Components..........................................................................................................4068 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4069 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4069 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4069 SHOCK ABSORBER..........................................................................................................4070 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4070 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4070 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4070 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4070 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4070 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4070 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4071 Bound bumper and Bushing....................................................................................4071 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4071 SUSPENSION ARM..........................................................................................................4072 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4072 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4072 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4072 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................4072 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4072 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................4072 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................4072 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................4072 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4073 RADIUS ROD..............................................................................................................4074 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4074 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4074 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4074 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4074 FRONT LOWER LINK........................................................................................................4075 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4075 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4075 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4075 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4075 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING...........................................................................................4076 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4076 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4076 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4076 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4076 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................4077 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4077 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4077 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4077 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4077 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER..................................................................................................4078 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4078 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4078 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4078 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4078 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4079 Wheel Alignment.....................................................................................................4079 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................4079 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................4079 sb..............................................................................................................................4080 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4080 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4081 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4081 Precaution for Seat Belt Service....................................................................................4081 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4081 SEAT BELTS..............................................................................................................4083 System Description..................................................................................................4083 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................4083 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP..........................................................................................4083 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt.........................................................................4083 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR............................................................................4084 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.......................................................................4084 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE...............................................................................4084 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE..........................................................................4084 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt..........................................................................4085 REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.............................................................................4086 INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR........................................................................4086 Seat Belt Inspection................................................................................................4087 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4087 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4087 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION.......................................................................4088 Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)...................................4088 Stationary Inspection for ELR Function......................................................................4088 Stationary Inspection for ALR Function......................................................................4088 Moving Inspection for ELR Function..........................................................................4088 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE INSPECTION......................................................................4089 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM....................................................................4090 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4090 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4090 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4090 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT........................................................................................4091 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4091 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4091 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4091 sc..............................................................................................................................4092 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4092 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4093 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4093 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4093 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4094 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4094 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4094 BATTERY.................................................................................................................4095 How to Handle Battery...............................................................................................4095 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE............................................................................4095 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL......................................................................................4096 Sulphation..................................................................................................4096 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK..........................................................................................4096 Hydrometer Temperature Correction...........................................................................4096 CHARGING THE BATTERY............................................................................................4097 Charging Rates..............................................................................................4097 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4097 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4099 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4100 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4100 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4100 STARTING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4101 System Description..................................................................................................4101 Wiring Diagram — START —............................................................................................4102 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4102 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4103 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4104 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4104 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4105 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4106 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4106 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4107 Check “S” Connector Circuit.................................................................................4107 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE.......................................4107 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4108 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4108 Removal.....................................................................................................4108 Installation................................................................................................4108 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4109 Removal.....................................................................................................4109 Installation................................................................................................4109 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4110 Removal.....................................................................................................4110 Installation................................................................................................4110 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4111 Inspection After Disassembly........................................................................................4113 PINION/CLUTCH CHECK.............................................................................................4113 CHARGING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4114 System Description..................................................................................................4114 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —...........................................................................................4115 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4115 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4116 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester......................................................4117 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4118 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4119 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4120 Check “L” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4120 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4121 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4121 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4122 Check “L” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4122 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4..........................................................................................4123 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4123 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4124 Check “S” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4124 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...........................................................................................4124 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4125 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4125 Removal.....................................................................................................4125 Installation................................................................................................4126 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4126 Removal.....................................................................................................4126 Installation................................................................................................4127 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4128 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4130 Battery.............................................................................................................4130 Starter.............................................................................................................4130 Alternator..........................................................................................................4130 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 se..............................................................................................................................4132 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4132 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4134 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4134 Service Notice......................................................................................................4134 Precautions for Work................................................................................................4134 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4135 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4135 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4135 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................4136 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4136 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4136 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4137 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4137 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4137 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4137 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4138 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4138 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4138 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4138 DOORS...........................................................................................................4138 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4139 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4139 SEATS...........................................................................................................4139 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4139 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4140 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER..............................................................................................4142 System Description..................................................................................................4142 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................4142 AUTOMATIC OPERATION.............................................................................................4142 MEMORY STORING AND KEY FOB INTERLOCK STORING....................................................................4142 MEMORY SWITCH OPERATION.........................................................................................4144 ENTRY OPERATION.................................................................................................4144 EXITING OPERATION...............................................................................................4144 KEY FOB INTERLOCK OPERATION.....................................................................................4145 FAIL- SAFE MODE.................................................................................................4145 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE........................................................................................4145 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4146 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4147 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4147 Schematic...........................................................................................................4148 Wiring Diagram–AUT/DP–..............................................................................................4150 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4161 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit..........................................4161 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit.........................................................4163 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4165 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4166 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION.........................................................................................4166 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND...................................................................................4166 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4169 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................4169 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..........................................................................................4170 Display Item List...........................................................................................4170 CAN DIAGNOSIS SUPPORT MONITOR...................................................................................4171 Can Diagnosis Support Monitor...............................................................................4171 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4171 Selection from Menu.........................................................................................4171 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4172 Display Item List...........................................................................................4172 Can Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-diagnosis)......................................................4173 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................4173 Sliding Motor Circuit Check.........................................................................................4175 Reclining Motor Circuit Check.......................................................................................4176 Front Lifting Motor Circuit Check...................................................................................4177 Rear Lifting Motor Circuit Check....................................................................................4179 Telescopic Motor Circuit Check......................................................................................4180 Tilt Motor Circuit Check............................................................................................4182 Driver Side Mirror Motor Circuit Check..............................................................................4183 Passenger Side Mirror Motor Circuit Check...........................................................................4185 Sliding Sensor Circuit Check........................................................................................4187 Reclining Sensor Circuit Check......................................................................................4188 Front Lifting Sensor Circuit Check..................................................................................4189 Rear Lifting Sensor Circuit Check...................................................................................4190 Telescopic Sensor Circuit Check.....................................................................................4191 Tilt Sensor Circuit Check...........................................................................................4192 Driver Side Mirror Sensor Circuit Check.............................................................................4193 Passenger Side Mirror Sensor Circuit Check..........................................................................4194 Steering and Door Mirror Sensor Power and Ground Circuit Check......................................................4195 Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Circuit Check.......................................................................4196 Sliding Switch Circuit Check........................................................................................4198 Reclining Switch Check..............................................................................................4199 Front Lifting Switch Circuit Check..................................................................................4201 Rear Lifting Switch Circuit Check...................................................................................4202 Sliding Switch and Reclining Switch Ground Circuit Check............................................................4203 Front Lifting Switch and Rear Lifting Switch Ground Circuit Check...................................................4204 Telescopic Switch Circuit Check.....................................................................................4205 Tilt Switch Circuit Check...........................................................................................4207 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover switch) Circuit Check.................................................4209 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check.....................................................4211 Detention Switch (P Range Switch) Circuit Check.....................................................................4213 Key Switch and Key Lock Solenoid Circuit Check (With Intelligent Key)...............................................4214 Key Switch Circuit Check (Without Intelligent Key)..................................................................4216 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Check....................................................................................4217 Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Check.................................................................................4219 Uart Communication Line Circuit Check...............................................................................4220 Lumber Support Circuit Check........................................................................................4222 POWER SEAT..............................................................................................................4224 Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Power Seat..................................................................4224 Schematic...........................................................................................................4225 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– / For Driver Seat..............................................................................4226 Wiring Diagram–SEAT– / For Passenger Seat...........................................................................4228 HEATED SEAT.............................................................................................................4229 Description.........................................................................................................4229 Wiring Diagram – HSEAT –............................................................................................4230 FRONT SEAT..............................................................................................................4232 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4232 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4234 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4235 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4235 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4236 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4236 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4237 REAR SEAT...............................................................................................................4238 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4238 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4240 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4240 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4240 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4241 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4241 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4241 REMOVAL OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................4242 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER............................................................................4242 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 srs.............................................................................................................................4244 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4244 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4246 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4246 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service.................................................4246 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4246 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4247 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4247 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4247 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS).....................................................................................4248 SRS Configuration...................................................................................................4248 Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter.....................................................................4249 Front Side Air Bag..................................................................................................4249 Side Curtain Air Bag................................................................................................4249 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4250 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction......................................................................................4250 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..............................................................................................4250 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR..................................................4250 Information from Customer...................................................................................4250 Preliminary Check...........................................................................................4250 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4251 Component Parts Location............................................................................................4252 Schematic...........................................................................................................4253 Wiring Diagram — SRS —..............................................................................................4254 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4258 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II...................................................................................4258 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II...............................................................4258 From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode............................................................................4258 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode............................................................................4258 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS............................................................................4259 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)........................................................................4259 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................4259 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS.............................................................................4259 SRS Operation Check.................................................................................................4260 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4260 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode......................................4260 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II...................................................................................4262 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4262 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”)....................................................4263 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4266 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)..................................................4268 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4268 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)..............................4270 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II................................................................................4272 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6..........................................................................................4272 Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — Diagnosis Mode........................4272 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART...................................................................................4273 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF.........................................................4277 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7..........................................................................................4277 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON..........................................................4278 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8..........................................................................................4278 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE...................................................................................................4279 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4279 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4279 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4280 SPIRAL CABLE............................................................................................................4281 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4281 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4281 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4282 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE..........................................................................................4283 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4283 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4283 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4283 FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE...............................................................................................4284 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4284 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4284 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4285 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE.............................................................................................4286 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4286 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4286 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4287 CRASH ZONE SENSOR.......................................................................................................4288 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4288 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4288 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4288 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR.........................................................................................4289 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4289 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4289 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4289 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER...........................................................................................4290 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4290 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT...................................................................................................4291 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4291 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4291 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4291 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO............................................................................................4291 DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER..................................................................4292 Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner..............................................................4292 CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL........................................................................................4292 Connecting to Battery.......................................................................................4292 Deployment Tool Check.......................................................................................4292 Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery Connected).........................................4293 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)...................................................4293 Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)....................................................4293 Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)...........................................4294 Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)................................................4295 Deployment of Side Curtain Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)..............................................4296 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)..........................................4297 DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE...............................4298 DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER.........................................................4298 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................................4299 For Frontal Collision...............................................................................................4299 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)..........................................................................4299 For Side Collision..................................................................................................4300 WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:.......................................................4300 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:................................................................4301 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION).............................................................................4301 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 tf..............................................................................................................................4304 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4304 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4306 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4306 Precautions.........................................................................................................4306 Service Notice......................................................................................................4307 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4307 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4308 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4308 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4309 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4310 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4310 TRANSFER FLUID..........................................................................................................4311 Replacement.........................................................................................................4311 DRAINING........................................................................................................4311 FILLING.........................................................................................................4311 Inspection..........................................................................................................4311 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL...................................................................................4311 AWD SYSTEM..............................................................................................................4312 Power Transfer Diagram..............................................................................................4312 System Description..................................................................................................4312 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4312 ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING....................................................................................4313 Operation principle.........................................................................................4313 AWD CONTROL UNIT................................................................................................4313 AWD WARNING LAMP................................................................................................4314 AWD Warning Lamp Indication.................................................................................4314 System Diagram......................................................................................................4314 COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION.................................................................................4315 CAN Communication...................................................................................................4315 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4315 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4316 Fail-Safe Function..................................................................................................4316 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................4316 BASIC CONCEPT...................................................................................................4316 Location of Electrical Parts........................................................................................4317 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................4318 Wiring Diagram — AWD —..............................................................................................4319 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms................................................................................4322 AWD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values...............................................................4322 AWD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE...............................................................................4322 Specifications with CONSULT-II..............................................................................4322 CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)..............................................................................4324 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4324 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4324 SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE...........................................................................................4324 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4324 Display Item List...........................................................................................4325 How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results........................................................................4325 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4326 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4326 Display Item List...........................................................................................4326 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4327 Description.................................................................................................4327 Test Item...................................................................................................4327 AWD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER....................................................................................4327 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM............................................................................................4328 Power Supply Circuit For AWD Control Unit...........................................................................4328 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4328 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4328 AWD Control Unit....................................................................................................4329 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4329 ABS System..........................................................................................................4329 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4329 AWD Solenoid........................................................................................................4330 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4330 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4330 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................4332 AWD Actuator Relay..................................................................................................4333 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4333 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4333 Engine Control Signal...............................................................................................4334 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4334 CAN Communication Line..............................................................................................4334 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4334 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4335 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The Ignition Switch Is Turned To ON..........................................4335 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4335 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds After Engine Started.............................................4335 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4335 Heavy Tight-corner Braking Symptom Occurs When The Vehicle Is Driven And The Steering Wheel Is Tu...................4337 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4337 Vehicle Does Not Enter AWD Mode Even Though AWD Warning Lamp Turned To OFF..........................................4338 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4338 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly (When Flashing In Approx. 1 Minute And Then Turni...................4339 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly (When Continuing To Flash Until Turning Ignition S...................4339 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4339 AWD CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................4341 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4341 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4341 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4341 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4342 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4342 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4342 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4342 REAR OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4343 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4343 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4343 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4344 AIR BREATHER HOSE.......................................................................................................4345 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4345 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................4346 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4346 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4346 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4346 Components..........................................................................................................4347 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4348 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4348 Removal Front Case..........................................................................................4348 Rear Case...................................................................................................4349 Front Drive Shaft...........................................................................................4351 Main Shaft and Electric Controlled Coupling.................................................................4352 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4352 Gears.......................................................................................................4352 Bearings....................................................................................................4352 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4352 Washers.....................................................................................................4352 Oil Seals...................................................................................................4352 Snap Ring...................................................................................................4352 Lock Nut....................................................................................................4352 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4352 Rear Case...................................................................................................4352 Main Shaft and Electric Controlled Coupling.................................................................4354 Front Drive Shaft...........................................................................................4354 Front Case..................................................................................................4355 Install Rear Case...........................................................................................4355 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4358 General Specifications..............................................................................................4358 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 wt..............................................................................................................................4360 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4360 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4361 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4361 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4361 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4362 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4362 ROAD WHEEL..............................................................................................................4363 Inspection..........................................................................................................4363 ALUMINUM WHEEL..................................................................................................4363 STEEL WHEEL.....................................................................................................4363 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4364 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4364 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4364 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4364 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4365 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................................4366 System Components...................................................................................................4366 System Description..................................................................................................4366 TRANSMITTER.....................................................................................................4366 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................4366 ANTENNA.........................................................................................................4367 DISPLAY UNIT....................................................................................................4367 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................4368 System Description..................................................................................................4368 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.......................................................................................................4369 Schematic...........................................................................................................4369 Wiring Diagram......................................................................................................4370 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard...........................................................................4373 ID Registration Procedure...........................................................................................4373 ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL................................................................4373 ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL.............................................................4374 Transmitter Wake Up Operation.......................................................................................4375 WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL................................................................................4375 Self-Diagnosis......................................................................................................4376 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4376 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4376 CONSULT-II......................................................................................................4376 CONSULT-II Main Function....................................................................................4376 CONSULT-II Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System..................................................4376 Self-Diagnostic Results Mode................................................................................4376 Data Monitor Mode...........................................................................................4377 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair......................................................4378 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................4378 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4378 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4379 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart......................................................................................4380 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS.............................................................................4381 Inspection 1: Transmitter or Low Tire Pressure Warning Control Unit.................................................4381 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 or 24...........................................................................4381 Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1.......................................................................................4381 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 or 48...........................................4381 Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2.......................................................................................4382 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 or 38...........................................................................4382 Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal..................................................................................4383 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52.........................................................................................4383 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4384 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.......................................4384 Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...............................................4385 Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.................................................4387 Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On..........................................4388 Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist............................................4389 Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed...................................................................4389 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................................................4390 Transmitter.........................................................................................................4390 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4390 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4390 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4392 Road Wheel..........................................................................................................4392 Tire................................................................................................................4392 Tightening Torque...................................................................................................4392 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83 ww..............................................................................................................................4394 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4394 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................4396 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4396 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4396 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM...........................................................................................4397 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location.....................................................................4397 System Description..................................................................................................4397 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION.......................................................................................4398 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION........................................................................................4398 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4398 Wiper Dial Position Setting.................................................................................4399 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4399 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4399 MIST OPERATION..................................................................................................4399 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION..............................................................................................4400 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4400 Description.................................................................................................4400 Operation Description.......................................................................................4400 BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches...............................................................4401 Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch Turned ON).............................................................4401 Operation Mode..............................................................................................4402 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4402 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4402 Schematic...........................................................................................................4403 Wiring Diagram — WIPER —............................................................................................4404 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4407 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4408 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4408 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4409 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4409 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4410 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4410 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4411 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4411 Display Item List...........................................................................................4411 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4412 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4412 Display Item List...........................................................................................4412 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4412 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4412 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.........................................................................................4413 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4413 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4413 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................4413 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4414 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4414 Front Wiper Does Not Operate........................................................................................4414 Front Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position........................................................................4417 Only Front Wiper LO Does Not Operate................................................................................4417 Only Front Wiper HI Does Not Operate................................................................................4418 Only Front Wiper INT Does Not Operate...............................................................................4418 Front Wiper Interval Time Is Not Controlled by Vehicle Speed........................................................4419 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted...............................................4419 Wipers Do Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates.......................................................................4419 After Front Wipers Operate for 10 Seconds, They Stop for 20 Seconds, and after repeating the oper...................4420 Front Wipers Do Not Stop............................................................................................4421 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location................................4421 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4421 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4421 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4422 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4422 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4422 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4422 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Wiper Motor and Linkage...........................................................4423 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4423 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4423 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4423 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4425 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Nozzle.....................................................................4425 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Tube Joint.................................................................4425 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4425 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4425 Check Valve Inspection..............................................................................................4425 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper and Washer Switch...........................................................4426 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4426 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4426 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4426 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4426 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4427 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor............................................................................4427 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4427 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4427 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM............................................................................................4428 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4428 System Description..................................................................................................4428 REAR WIPER OPERATION............................................................................................4428 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4429 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4429 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4429 BCM WIPER SWITCH READING FUNCTION...............................................................................4429 Wiring Diagram — WIP/ R —...........................................................................................4430 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4432 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4433 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4433 INSPECTION POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT......................................................................4433 CONSULT-II Functions................................................................................................4434 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4434 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4435 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4435 Display Item List...........................................................................................4435 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4436 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4436 Display Item List...........................................................................................4436 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate.........................................................................................4436 Rear Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position.........................................................................4438 Only Rear Wiper ON Does Not Operate.................................................................................4439 Only Rear Wiper INT Does Not Operate................................................................................4439 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates.......................................................................4439 Rear Wipers Do Not Stop.............................................................................................4439 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location..................................4441 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4441 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4441 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor........................................................................4441 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4442 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4442 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Blade........................................................................4442 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4442 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4442 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4442 Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle...........................................................................4443 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4443 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4443 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4443 Check Valve Inspection..............................................................................................4444 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper and Washer Switch............................................................4444 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4444 Removal and Installation of Washer Pump.............................................................................4444 CIGARETTE LIGHTER.......................................................................................................4445 Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —............................................................................................4445 Removal and Installation of Cigarette Lighter.......................................................................4446 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4446 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4446 POWER SOCKET............................................................................................................4447 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —...........................................................................................4447 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Rear Side Power Socket...............................................4448 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4448 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4448 Removal and Installation of Center Console Box Power Socket.........................................................4448 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4448 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4448 Removal and Installation of Luggage Room Power Socket...............................................................4448 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4448 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4448 HORN....................................................................................................................4449 Wiring Diagram — HORN —.............................................................................................4449 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4450 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4450 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4450 JOINT CONNECTOR (J/C)................................................................................................... 75 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 76 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 78 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 82 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 83
Questions? Email us: [email protected]
https://vimeo.com/873224684?share=copy
PLEASE NOTE:
- This is the same manual used by the dealers to diagnose and troubleshoot your vehicle
- You will be directed to the download page as soon as the purchase is completed. The whole payment and downloading process will take anywhere between 2-5 minutes
- Need any other service / repair / parts manual, please feel free to contact [email protected] . We still have 50,000 manuals unlisted
S.V
